Solaris Live Upgrade

Oracle® Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning

Part No: 821–1910–10September 2010

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectualproperty laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software,unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the followingnotice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are“commercial computer software” or “commercial technical data” pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplementalregulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicableGovernment contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, CommercialComputer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherentlydangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then youshall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim anyliability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. Intel and Intel Xeon aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARCInternational, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation andits affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporationand its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.

Copyright © 2010, Oracle et/ou ses affiliés. Tous droits réservés.

Ce logiciel et la documentation qui l’accompagne sont protégés par les lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ils sont concédés sous licence et soumis à des restrictionsd’utilisation et de divulgation. Sauf disposition de votre contrat de licence ou de la loi, vous ne pouvez pas copier, reproduire, traduire, diffuser, modifier, breveter,transmettre, distribuer, exposer, exécuter, publier ou afficher le logiciel, même partiellement, sous quelque forme et par quelque procédé que ce soit. Par ailleurs, il estinterdit de procéder à toute ingénierie inverse du logiciel, de le désassembler ou de le décompiler, excepté à des fins d’interopérabilité avec des logiciels tiers ou tel queprescrit par la loi.

Les informations fournies dans ce document sont susceptibles de modification sans préavis. Par ailleurs, Oracle Corporation ne garantit pas qu’elles soient exemptesd’erreurs et vous invite, le cas échéant, à lui en faire part par écrit.

Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l’accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logicielou l’utilise pour le compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s’applique :

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are"commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplementalregulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicableGovernment contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, CommercialComputer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

Ce logiciel ou matériel a été développé pour un usage général dans le cadre d’applications de gestion des informations. Ce logiciel ou matériel n’est pas conçu ni n’estdestiné à être utilisé dans des applications à risque, notamment dans des applications pouvant causer des dommages corporels. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel ou matérieldans le cadre d’applications dangereuses, il est de votre responsabilité de prendre toutes les mesures de secours, de sauvegarde, de redondance et autres mesuresnécessaires à son utilisation dans des conditions optimales de sécurité. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité quant aux dommages causéspar l’utilisation de ce logiciel ou matériel pour ce type d’applications.

Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d’Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés.Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant àd’autres propriétaires qu’Oracle.

AMD, Opteron, le logo AMD et le logo AMD Opteron sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Advanced Micro Devices. Intel et Intel Xeon sont des marques oudes marques déposées d’Intel Corporation. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques ou des marques déposées de SPARCInternational, Inc. UNIX est une marque déposée concédé sous license par X/Open Company, Ltd.

110417@25097

Contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................11

Part I Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade ............................................................................................. 15

1 Where to Find Solaris Installation Planning Information ............................................................ 17Where to Find Planning and System Requirement Information .................................................. 17

2 Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview) .......................................................................................................19Solaris Live Upgrade Introduction .................................................................................................... 19Solaris Live Upgrade Process ............................................................................................................. 20

Creating a Boot Environment .................................................................................................... 22Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volume File Systems ...................................... 27Upgrading a Boot Environment ................................................................................................. 33Activating a Boot Environment ................................................................................................. 38Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment ....................................................................... 40Maintaining a Boot Environment .............................................................................................. 42

3 Solaris Live Upgrade (Planning) .......................................................................................................43Solaris Live Upgrade Requirements .................................................................................................. 43

Solaris Live Upgrade System Requirements ............................................................................. 43Installing Solaris Live Upgrade ................................................................................................... 44Solaris Live Upgrade Disk Space Requirements ....................................................................... 46Solaris Live Upgrade Requirements if Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) ...................... 47

Upgrading a System With Packages or Patches ............................................................................... 47Upgrading and Patching Limitations ................................................................................................ 48Guidelines for Creating File Systems With the lucreate Command ........................................... 48Guidelines for Selecting Slices for File Systems ............................................................................... 49

3

Guidelines for Selecting a Slice for the root (/) File System .................................................... 49Guidelines for Selecting Slices for Mirrored File Systems ....................................................... 50Guidelines for Selecting a Slice for a Swap Volume ................................................................. 51Guidelines for Selecting Slices for Shareable File Systems ...................................................... 52

Customizing a New Boot Environment's Content .......................................................................... 53Synchronizing Files Between Boot Environments .......................................................................... 54

Adding Files to the /etc/lu/synclist ..................................................................................... 54Forcing a Synchronization Between Boot Environments ....................................................... 55

Booting Multiple Boot Environments .............................................................................................. 56Solaris Live Upgrade Character User Interface ................................................................................ 58

4 Using Solaris Live Upgrade to Create a Boot Environment (Tasks) .............................................59Task Map: Installing Solaris Live Upgrade and Creating Boot Environments ............................ 59Installing Solaris Live Upgrade .......................................................................................................... 60

▼ To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the pkgadd Command ................................................. 60▼ To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the Solaris Installation Program ................................ 61

Installing Patches Needed by Solaris Live Upgrade ................................................................. 63Creating a New Boot Environment ................................................................................................... 64

▼ To Create a Boot Environment for the First Time ................................................................... 64▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Merge File Systems ......................................................... 67▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Split File Systems ............................................................ 69▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Reconfiguring Swap ....................................................... 70▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Reconfigure Swap by Using a List ................................ 72▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Copy a Shareable File System ........................................ 74▼ To Create a Boot Environment From a Different Source ........................................................ 76▼ To Create an Empty Boot Environment for a Solaris Flash Archive ..................................... 77▼ To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) ....................................... 79▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Customize the Content .................................................. 84

5 Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks) ................................................................................ 89Task Map: Upgrading a Boot Environment ..................................................................................... 89Upgrading a Boot Environment ........................................................................................................ 90

Guidelines for Upgrading ........................................................................................................... 90▼ To Upgrade a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment ...................................... 91▼ To Upgrade a Network Installation Image From Multiple CDs ............................................. 93

Contents

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning • September 20104

▼ To Add Packages to a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment ......................... 94▼ To Add Patches to a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment ........................... 96▼ To Obtain Information on Packages Installed on a Boot Environment ................................ 97

Upgrading by Using a JumpStart Profile ................................................................................... 98Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a Boot Environment ............................................................ 105

▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive on a Boot Environment ................................................... 106▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Profile .................................................................... 107▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Profile Keyword ................................................... 109

Activating a Boot Environment ....................................................................................................... 110Requirements and Limitations for Activating a Boot Environment ................................... 111

▼ To Activate a Boot Environment ............................................................................................. 111▼ To Activate a Boot Environment and Synchronize Files ....................................................... 112

x86: Activating a Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu ............................................... 114▼ x86: To Activate a Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu ............................................. 115

6 Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment (Tasks) ...............................117SPARC: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment .............................................................. 118

▼ SPARC: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation ................... 118▼ SPARC: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation .................................... 118▼ SPARC: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or Net

Installation Image ...................................................................................................................... 119x86: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment .................................................................... 120

▼ x86: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation With the GRUBMenu ............................................................................................................................................ 121

▼ x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menu ... 122▼ x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menu and

the DVD or CD ........................................................................................................................... 124

7 Maintaining Solaris Live Upgrade Boot Environments (Tasks) ................................................. 127Overview of Solaris Live Upgrade Maintenance ........................................................................... 128Displaying the Status of All Boot Environments ........................................................................... 128

▼ To Display the Status of All Boot Environments .................................................................... 129Updating a Previously Configured Boot Environment ................................................................ 130

▼ To Update a Previously Configured Boot Environment ....................................................... 130Canceling a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy Job .................................................................. 131

Contents

5

▼ To Cancel a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy Job .......................................................... 131Comparing Boot Environments ...................................................................................................... 131

▼ To Compare Boot Environments ............................................................................................ 132Deleting an Inactive Boot Environment ......................................................................................... 132

▼ To Delete an Inactive Boot Environment ............................................................................... 133Displaying the Name of the Active Boot Environment ................................................................. 133

▼ To Display the Name of the Active Boot Environment ......................................................... 133Changing the Name of a Boot Environment .................................................................................. 134

▼ To Change the Name of an Inactive Boot Environment ....................................................... 135Adding or Changing a Description Associated With a Boot Environment Name .................... 135

▼ To Add or Change a Description for a Boot Environment Name With Text ..................... 135▼ To Add or Change a Description for a Boot Environment Name With a File .................... 136▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Name From a Text Description .................................. 136▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Name From a Description in a File ............................ 137▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Description From a Name ........................................... 138

Viewing the Configuration of a Boot Environment ...................................................................... 138▼ To View the Configuration of a Boot Environment .............................................................. 138

8 Upgrading the Solaris OS on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed ................................141Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade and Installed Non-Global Zones (Overview) .............. 141

Understanding Solaris Zones and Solaris Live Upgrade ....................................................... 142Guidelines for Using Solaris Live Upgrade With Non-Global Zones (Planning) ..................... 146

Creating a Boot Environment When a Non-Global Zone Is on a Separate File System .... 147Creating and Upgrading a Boot Environment When Non-Global Zones Are Installed(Tasks) ................................................................................................................................................ 148

▼ Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade When Non-Global Zones Are Installed on a System(Tasks) ......................................................................................................................................... 148

Upgrading a System With Non-Global Zones Installed (Example) ............................................ 152Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade When Non-Global Zones Are Installed on aSystem .......................................................................................................................................... 153

Administering Boot Environments That Contain Non-Global Zones ....................................... 154▼ To View the Configuration of a Boot Environment's Non-Global Zone File Systems ...... 154▼ To Compare Boot Environments for a System With Non-Global Zones Installed ........... 155

Using the lumount Command on a System That Contains Non-Global Zones ................. 156

Contents


9 Solaris Live Upgrade (Examples) ....................................................................................................157Example of Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade ....................................................................... 157

Prepare to Use Solaris Live Upgrade ........................................................................................ 157To Create a Boot Environment ................................................................................................ 160To Upgrade the Inactive Boot Environment .......................................................................... 160To Check if Boot Environment Is Bootable ............................................................................ 160To Activate the Inactive Boot Environment ........................................................................... 160(Optional) To Fall Back to the Source Boot Environment .................................................... 161

Example of Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror) ...................... 165Example of Migrating From an Existing Volume to a Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1Volume ............................................................................................................................................... 168Example of Creating an Empty Boot Environment and Installing a Solaris Flash Archive ..... 168

To Create an Empty Boot Environment ................................................................................. 169To Install a Solaris Flash Archive on the New Boot Environment ....................................... 170To Activate the New Boot Environment ................................................................................. 170

10 Solaris Live Upgrade (Command Reference) ................................................................................ 171Solaris Live Upgrade Command-Line Options ............................................................................. 171

Part II Upgrading and Migrating With Solaris Live Upgrade to a ZFS Root Pool ................................ 173

11 Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS (Overview) ..................................................................................... 175What's New in the Solaris 10 10/09 Release .................................................................................... 176Introduction to Using Solaris Live Upgrade With ZFS ................................................................ 176Migrating From a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool ................................................................. 177

Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System to ZFS Root Pool .............................................. 177Migrating a UFS File System With Solaris Volume Manager Volumes Configured to a ZFSRoot File System ......................................................................................................................... 179

Creating a New Boot Environment From a ZFS Root Pool .......................................................... 180Creating a New Boot Environment Within the Same Root Pool ......................................... 180Creating a New Boot Environment on Another Root Pool .................................................. 182

Creating a New Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently RunningSystem ................................................................................................................................................. 184Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed ................. 184Additional Resources ........................................................................................................................ 185

Contents

7

12 Solaris Live Upgrade for ZFS (Planning) ........................................................................................ 187System Requirements and Limitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade ............................... 187Additional Resources ........................................................................................................................ 190

13 Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools ........................................................................ 191Migrating a UFS File System to a ZFS File System ......................................................................... 191

▼ How to Migrate a UFS File System to a ZFS File System ....................................................... 192Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool .................................................. 197

▼ How to Create a ZFS Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool ......................... 197Creating a Boot Environment In a New Root Pool ........................................................................ 201

▼ How to Create a Boot Environment on a New ZFS Root Pool .............................................. 202Creating a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently Running System .... 206Falling Back to a ZFS Boot Environment ........................................................................................ 207Additional Resources ........................................................................................................................ 207

14 Solaris Live Upgrade For ZFS With Non-Global Zones Installed .................................................209Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed (Overviewand Planning) ..................................................................................................................................... 209Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With Non-Global Zones Installed to ZFS Root Pool(Tasks) ................................................................................................................................................ 210

▼ How to Migrate a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool on a System With Non-GlobalZones ........................................................................................................................................... 210

Additional Resources ........................................................................................................................ 216

Part III Appendices .........................................................................................................................................217

A Troubleshooting (Tasks) ...................................................................................................................219Problems With Setting Up Network Installations ......................................................................... 219Problems With Booting a System .................................................................................................... 220

Booting From Media, Error Messages ..................................................................................... 220Booting From Media, General Problems ................................................................................ 221Booting From the Network, Error Messages .......................................................................... 222Booting From the Network, General Problems ...................................................................... 225

Initial Installation of the Solaris OS ................................................................................................. 226▼ x86: To Check IDE Disk for Bad Blocks .................................................................................. 226

Contents


Upgrading the Solaris OS ................................................................................................................. 228Upgrading, Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 228Upgrading, General Problems .................................................................................................. 229

▼ To Continue Upgrading After a Failed Upgrade ................................................................... 231x86: Problems With Solaris Live Upgrade When You Use GRUB ....................................... 231

▼ System Panics When Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade Running Veritas VxVm ..... 233x86: Service Partition Not Created by Default on Systems With No Existing ServicePartition ...................................................................................................................................... 235

▼ To Install Software From a Network Installation Image or From the Solaris OperatingSystem DVD ............................................................................................................................... 235

▼ To Install From the Solaris Software - 1 CD or From a Network Installation Image ......... 236

B Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) ............................................................. 237Preventing Modification of the Current OS ................................................................................... 237

Using Absolute Paths ................................................................................................................. 237Using the pkgadd -R Command ............................................................................................... 238Differences Between $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT and $BASEDIR Overview ................................... 238Guidelines for Writing Scripts .................................................................................................. 239Maintaining Diskless Client Compatibility ............................................................................ 239Verifying Packages ..................................................................................................................... 240

Preventing User Interaction When Installing or Upgrading ....................................................... 241Setting Package Parameters For Zones ........................................................................................... 242For Background Information ........................................................................................................... 245

C Using the Patch Analyzer When Upgrading (Tasks) .................................................................... 247Upgrading to a Solaris Update Release ........................................................................................... 247

▼ To Run the analyze_patches Script ....................................................................................... 248▼ To Review the Patch Analyzer Output .................................................................................... 249

Glossary .............................................................................................................................................. 251

Index ................................................................................................................................................... 263

Contents

9

10

Preface

This book describes how to install and upgrade the Solaris Operating System (OS) on bothnetworked and nonnetworked SPARC and x86 architecture based systems.

This book does not include instructions about how to set up system hardware or otherperipherals.

Note – This Solaris release supports systems that use the SPARC and x86 families of processorarchitectures. The supported systems appear in the Solaris OS: Hardware Compatibility Lists(http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/hcl). This document cites any implementation differencesbetween the platform types.

In this document these x86 related terms mean the following:

■ “x86” refers to the larger family of 64-bit and 32-bit x86 compatible products.■ “x64” relates specifically to 64-bit x86 compatible CPUs.■ “32-bit x86” points out specific 32-bit information about x86 based systems.

For supported systems, see the Solaris OS: Hardware Compatibility Lists.

Who Should Use This BookThis book is intended for system administrators responsible for installing the Solaris OS. Thisbook provides both of the following types of information.

■ Advanced Solaris installation information for enterprise system administrators whomanage multiple Solaris machines in a networked environment

■ Basic Solaris installation information for system administrators who perform infrequentSolaris upgrades

11

http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/hcl


Related BooksTable P–1 lists documentation for system administrators.

TABLE P–1 Are You a System Administrator Who is Installing Solaris?

Description Information

Do you need system requirements or high-level planning information?Or want a high-level overview of Solaris ZFS installations, booting,Solaris Zones partitioning technology, or creating RAID-1 volumes?

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning forInstallation and Upgrade

Do you need to install a single system from DVD or CD media? TheSolaris installation program steps you through an installation.

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Basic Installations

Do you need to upgrade or patch your system with almost nodowntime? Save system downtime when upgrading by using SolarisLive Upgrade.

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Solaris LiveUpgrade and Upgrade Planning

Do you need to install a secure installation over the network or Internet?Use WAN boot to install a remote client. Or, do you need to install overthe network from a network installation image? The Solaris installationprogram steps you through an installation.

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Network-BasedInstallations

Do you need to install Solaris on multiple machines? Use JumpStart toautomate your installation.

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStartand Advanced Installations

Do you need to install or patch multiple systems quickly? Use SolarisFlash software to create a Solaris Flash archive and install a copy of theOS on clone systems.

Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Solaris FlashArchives (Creation and Installation)

Do you need to back up your system? Chapter 23, “Backing Up and Restoring UFS File Systems(Overview),” in System Administration Guide: Devices andFile Systems

Do you need troubleshooting information, a list of known problems, ora list of patches for this release?

Oracle Solaris Release Notes

Do you need to verify that your system works on Solaris? SPARC: Solaris Sun Hardware Platform Guide

Do you need to check on which packages have been added, removed, orchanged in this release?

Oracle Solaris Package List

Do you need to verify that your system and devices work with SolarisSPARC and x86 based systems and other third-party vendors.

Solaris Hardware Compatibility List for x86 Platforms

Preface


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=solinstallpbiu

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=solinstallpbiu

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1908&id=solarisinstall

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1910&id=solinstallupg

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1910&id=solinstallupg

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1909&id=solinstallnet

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1909&id=solinstallnet

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=solinstalladv

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=solinstalladv

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1912&id=solinstallflash

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1912&id=solinstallflash

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-5093&id=bkupconcepts-57422




Documentation, Support, and TrainingSee the following web sites for additional resources:

■ Documentation (http://docs.sun.com)■ Support (http://www.oracle.com/us/support/systems/index.html)■ Training (http://education.oracle.com) – Click the Sun link in the left navigation bar.

Oracle Welcomes Your CommentsOracle welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of itsdocumentation. If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, go tohttp://docs.sun.com and click Feedback. Indicate the title and part number of thedocumentation along with the chapter, section, and page number, if available. Please let usknow if you want a reply.

Oracle Technology Network (http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/index.html) offers arange of resources related to Oracle software:

■ Discuss technical problems and solutions on the Discussion Forums(http://forums.oracle.com).

■ Get hands-on step-by-step tutorials with Oracle By Example (http://www.oracle.com/technology/obe/start/index.html).

■ Download Sample Code (http://www.oracle.com/technology/sample_code/index.html).

Typographic ConventionsThe following table describes the typographic conventions that are used in this book.

TABLE P–2 Typographic Conventions

Typeface Meaning Example

AaBbCc123 The names of commands, files, and directories,and onscreen computer output

Edit your .login file.

Use ls -a to list all files.

machine_name% you have mail.

AaBbCc123 What you type, contrasted with onscreencomputer output

machine_name% su

Password:

aabbcc123 Placeholder: replace with a real name or value The command to remove a file is rmfilename.

Preface

13

http://docs.sun.com

http://www.oracle.com/us/support/systems/index.html

http://education.oracle.com

http://docs.sun.com

http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/index.html

http://forums.oracle.com

http://forums.oracle.com

http://www.oracle.com/technology/obe/start/index.html

http://www.oracle.com/technology/obe/start/index.html

http://www.oracle.com/technology/sample_code/index.html

http://www.oracle.com/technology/sample_code/index.html

TABLE P–2 Typographic Conventions (Continued)Typeface Meaning Example

AaBbCc123 Book titles, new terms, and terms to beemphasized

Read Chapter 6 in the User's Guide.

A cache is a copy that is storedlocally.

Do not save the file.

Note: Some emphasized itemsappear bold online.

Shell Prompts in Command ExamplesThe following table shows the default UNIX system prompt and superuser prompt for shellsthat are included in the Oracle Solaris OS. Note that the default system prompt that is displayedin command examples varies, depending on the Oracle Solaris release.

TABLE P–3 Shell Prompts

Shell Prompt

Bash shell, Korn shell, and Bourne shell $

Bash shell, Korn shell, and Bourne shell for superuser #

C shell machine_name%

C shell for superuser machine_name#

Preface


Upgrading With Solaris Live UpgradeThis part provides an overview and instructions for using Solaris Live Upgrade to createand upgrade an inactive boot environment. The boot environment can then be switched tobecome the current boot environment. This part in written for a system with a UFS root (/)file system. However, many commands can be used for the ZFS file system.

P A R T I

15

16

Where to Find Solaris Installation PlanningInformation

This book provides information on how to use the Solaris Live Upgrade program to upgrade theSolaris operating system. This book provides all you need to know about using Solaris LiveUpgrade, but a planning book in our collection of installation documentation might be usefulto read before you begin. The following references provide useful information before youupgrade your system.

Where to Find Planning and System Requirement InformationThe Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning For Installation and Upgrade providessystem requirements and high-level planning information, such as planning guidelines for filesystems, and upgrade planning and much more. The following list describes the chapters in theplanning book and provides links to those chapters.

Chapter Descriptions From the Planning Guide Reference

This chapter describes new features in the Solaris installation programs. Chapter 2, “What’s New in Solaris Installation,” inOracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planningfor Installation and Upgrade

This chapter provides you with information about decisions you need to makebefore you install or upgrade the Solaris OS. Examples are deciding when to use anetwork installation image or DVD media and descriptions of all the Solarisinstallation programs.

Chapter 3, “Solaris Installation and Upgrade(Roadmap),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade

This chapter describes system requirements to install or upgrade to the SolarisOS. General guidelines for planning the disk space and default swap spaceallocation are also provided. Upgrade limitations are also described.

Chapter 4, “System Requirements, Guidelines, andUpgrade (Planning),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Planning for Installation andUpgrade

1C H A P T E R 1

17

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=gaufd



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=planning-8



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=diskspace-1




Chapter Descriptions From the Planning Guide Reference

This chapter contains checklists to help you gather all of the information that youneed to install or upgrade your system. This information is useful, for example, ifyou are performing an interactive installation. You'll have all the information inthe checklist that you'll need to do an interactive installation.

Chapter 5, “Gathering Information BeforeInstallation or Upgrade (Planning),” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning forInstallation and Upgrade

These chapters provide overviews of several technologies that relate to a SolarisOS installation or upgrade. Guidelines and requirements related to thesetechnologies are also included. These chapters include information about ZFSinstallations, booting, Solaris Zones partitioning technology, and RAID-1volumes that can be created at installation.

Part II, “Understanding Installations That Relateto ZFS, Booting, Solaris Zones, and RAID-1Volumes,” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade

Where to Find Planning and System Requirement Information


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=gatherinfo-1




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=epucs




Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview)

This chapter describes the Solaris Live Upgrade process.

Note – This book uses the term slice, but some Solaris documentation and programs might referto a slice as a partition.

Solaris Live Upgrade Introduction

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. For an overview ofmigrating a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFS root pool, seeChapter 11, “Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS (Overview).”

Solaris Live Upgrade provides a method of upgrading a system while the system continues tooperate. While your current boot environment is running, you can duplicate the bootenvironment, then upgrade the duplicate. Or, rather than upgrading, you can install a SolarisFlash archive on a boot environment. The original system configuration remains fullyfunctional and unaffected by the upgrade or installation of an archive. When you are ready, youcan activate the new boot environment by rebooting the system. If a failure occurs, you canquickly revert to the original boot environment with a simple reboot. This switch eliminates thenormal downtime of the test and evaluation process.

Solaris Live Upgrade enables you to duplicate a boot environment without affecting thecurrently running system. You can then do the following:

■ Upgrade a system.

2C H A P T E R 2

19

Note – Starting with the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release, the upgrade process is impacted byAuto Registration. See “Auto Registration Impact for Live Upgrade” on page 36.

■ Change the current boot environment's disk configuration to different file system types,sizes, and layouts on the new boot environment.

■ Maintain numerous boot environments with different images. For example, you can createone boot environment that contains current patches and create another boot environmentthat contains an Update release.

Some understanding of basic system administration is necessary before using Solaris LiveUpgrade. For background information about system administration tasks such as managing filesystems, mounting, booting, and managing swap, see the System Administration Guide: Devicesand File Systems.

Solaris Live Upgrade ProcessThe following overview describes the tasks necessary to create a copy of the current bootenvironment, upgrade the copy, and switch the upgraded copy to become the active bootenvironment. The fallback process of switching back to the original boot environment is alsodescribed. Figure 2–1 describes this complete Solaris Live Upgrade process.

Solaris Live Upgrade Process


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-5093&id=sagdfs


FIGURE 2–1 Solaris Live Upgrade Process


solenv1c0t0d0

solenv2c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)

......

Create a boot environment.

# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \-n solenv2

1

ReleaseY

SolarisFlash

archive

Upgrade

Release Y

(Optional) Remove the inactive boot environment.

# ludelete solenv2

5

Activate the inactive boot environment with a reboot.

# luactivate solenv2# init 6

3

solenv1c0t0d0

solenv2c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)

......

Activate

(Optional) Fallback to the original boot environment.

# luactivate solenv1# init 6

4

solenv1c0t0d0

solenv2c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)

......

Activate

Upgrade an inactive boot environment.

For a standard upgrade: # luupgrade -u -n solenv2 \ -s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris/OS_imagea

2

For a Solaris Flash archive: # luupgrade -f -n solenv2 \ -s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris/Release_Y \ -a /net/server/archive/Release_Y

b

solenv1c0t0d0

solenv2c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)

......

solenv1c0t0d0

solenv2c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)

......


Chapter 2 • Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview) 21

The following sections describe the Solaris Live Upgrade process.

1. A new boot environment can be created on a physical slice or a logical volume:■ “Creating a Boot Environment” on page 22■ “Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volume File Systems” on page 27

2. “Upgrading a Boot Environment” on page 33

3. “Activating a Boot Environment” on page 38

4. “Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment” on page 40

Creating a Boot EnvironmentThe process of creating a boot environment provides a method of copying critical file systemsfrom an active boot environment to a new boot environment. The disk is reorganized ifnecessary, file systems are customized, and the critical file systems are copied to the new bootenvironment.

File System TypesSolaris Live Upgrade distinguishes between two file system types: critical file systems andshareable. The following table describes these file system types.

File System Type Description Examples and More Information

Critical file systems Critical file systems are required by the Solaris OS. These filesystems are separate mount points in the vfstab of the active andinactive boot environments. These file systems are always copiedfrom the source to the inactive boot environment. Critical filesystems are sometimes referred to as nonshareable.

Examples are root (/), /usr, /var, or /opt.

Shareable filesystems

Shareable file systems are user-defined files such as /export thatcontain the same mount point in the vfstab in both the activeand inactive boot environments. Therefore, updating shared filesin the active boot environment also updates data in the inactiveboot environment. When you create a new boot environment,shareable file systems are shared by default. But you can specify adestination slice and then the file systems are copied.

/export is an example of a file system thatcan be shared.

For more detailed information aboutshareable file systems, see “Guidelines forSelecting Slices for Shareable File Systems”on page 52.



File System Type Description Examples and More Information

Swap ■ For UFS file systems, swap is a special shareable volume. Likea shareable file system, all swap slices are shared by default.But, if you specify a destination directory for swap, the swapslice is copied.

■ For ZFS file systems, swap and dump volumes are sharedwithin the pool.

■ For procedures about reconfiguringswap for UFS file systems, see “ToCreate a Boot Environment andReconfiguring Swap” on page 70.

■ For information about swap for ZFSroot pools, see “System Requirementsand Limitations When Using SolarisLive Upgrade” on page 187

Creating RAID-1 Volumes on File Systems

Solaris Live Upgrade can create a boot environment with RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) on filesystems. For an overview, see “Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volume FileSystems” on page 27.

Copying File SystemsThe process of creating a new boot environment begins by identifying an unused slice where acritical file system can be copied. If a slice is not available or a slice does not meet the minimumrequirements, you need to format a new slice.

After the slice is defined, you can reconfigure the file systems on the new boot environmentbefore the file systems are copied into the directories. You reconfigure file systems by splittingand merging them, which provides a simple way of editing the vfstab to connect anddisconnect file system directories. You can merge file systems into their parent directories byspecifying the same mount point. You can also split file systems from their parent directories byspecifying different mount points.

After file systems are configured on the inactive boot environment, you begin the automaticcopy. Critical file systems are copied to the designated directories. Shareable file systems are notcopied, but are shared. The exception is that you can designate some shareable file systems to becopied. When the file systems are copied from the active to the inactive boot environment, thefiles are directed to the new directories. The active boot environment is not changed in any way.

For procedures to split or merging file systems ■ “To Create a Boot Environment and Merge FileSystems” on page 67

■ “To Create a Boot Environment and Split FileSystems” on page 69

For an overview of creating a boot environment withRAID–1 volume file systems

“Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 VolumeFile Systems” on page 27



Examples of Creating a New Boot Environment

For UFS file systems, the following figures illustrate various ways of creating new bootenvironments.

For ZFS file systems, see Chapter 11, “Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS (Overview)”

Figure 2–2 shows that critical file system root (/) has been copied to another slice on a disk tocreate a new boot environment. The active boot environment contains the root (/) file systemon one slice. The new boot environment is an exact duplicate with the root (/) file system on anew slice. The /swap volume and /export/home file system are shared by the active and inactiveboot environments.



Figure 2–3 shows critical file systems that have been split and have been copied to slices on adisk to create a new boot environment. The active boot environment contains the root (/) filesystem on one slice. On that slice, the root (/) file system contains the /usr, /var, and /opt

directories. In the new boot environment, the root (/) file system is split and /usr and /opt areput on separate slices. The /swap volume and /export/home file system are shared by both bootenvironments.

FIGURE 2–2 Creating an Inactive Boot Environment – Copying the root (/) File System

Creating a Boot Environment –Copying the root (/) File System to a single slice

Current release XCritical file system root (/)

Inactive release XCritical file systems root (/)

Shared file systems

One hard disk

/export1

root (/)

Upgrade

c0t0d0

Copy

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

/export1

root (/)

Upgrade

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Copy

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Single disk command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s3:ufs \-n solenv2 Two disks command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s5:ufs \-n solenv2



Figure 2–4 shows critical file systems that have been merged and have been copied to slices on adisk to create a new boot environment. The active boot environment contains the root (/) filesystem, /usr, /var, and /opt with each file system on their own slice. In the new bootenvironment, /usr and /opt are merged into the root (/) file system on one slice. The /swapvolume and /export/home file system are shared by both boot environments.

FIGURE 2–3 Creating an Inactive Boot Environment – Splitting File Systems

Copy

Creating a Boot Environment – Splitting File Systems


Inactive release XCritical file systems root (/) /usr /opt

Shared file systems

One hard disk

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Upgrade

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Upgrade

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Single disk command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s3:ufs \-m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs \-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s5:ufs \-n solenv2 Two disks command: # lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s5:ufs \-m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s6:ufs \-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s8:ufs \-n solenv2

Copy



Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volume FileSystemsSolaris Live Upgrade uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create a boot environmentthat can contain file systems encapsulated in RAID-1 volumes. Solaris Volume Managerprovides a powerful way to reliably manage your disks and data by using volumes. SolarisVolume Manager enables concatenations, stripes, and other complex configurations. SolarisLive Upgrade enables a subset of these tasks, such as creating a RAID-1 volume for the root (/)file system.

A volume can group disk slices across several disks to transparently appear as a single disk to theOS. Solaris Live Upgrade is limited to creating a boot environment for the root (/) file system

FIGURE 2–4 Creating an Inactive Boot Environment – Merging File Systems

Creating a Boot Environment – Merging File Systems

Current release XCritical file systems root (/) /usr /opt

Inactive release YCritical file systems root (/)

Shared file systems

/export1

Upgrade

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Single disk command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s5:ufs \-n solenv2 Two disks command: # lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \-n solenv2

One hard disk

/export1

root(/)

Upgrade

c0t0d0

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Copy

/swap

/opt

/usr

root (/)Copy

/opt

/usr

root (/)



that contains single-slice concatenations inside a RAID-1 volume (mirror). This limitation isbecause the boot PROM is restricted to choosing one slice from which to boot.

How to Manage Volumes With Solaris Live UpgradeWhen creating a boot environment, you can use Solaris Live Upgrade to manage the followingtasks.

■ Detach a single-slice concatenation (submirror) from a RAID-1 volume (mirror). Thecontents can be preserved to become the content of the new boot environment if necessary.Because the contents are not copied, the new boot environment can be quickly created.After the submirror is detached from the original mirror, the submirror is no longer part ofthe mirror. Reads and writes on the submirror are no longer performed through the mirror.

■ Create a boot environment that contains a mirror.■ Attach a maximum of three single-slice concatenations to the newly created mirror.

You use the lucreate command with the -m option to create a mirror, detach submirrors, andattach submirrors for the new boot environment.

Note – If VxVM volumes are configured on your current system, the lucreate command cancreate a new boot environment. When the data is copied to the new boot environment, theVeritas file system configuration is lost and a UFS file system is created on the new bootenvironment.

For step-by-step procedures “To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1Volumes (Mirrors)” on page 79

For an overview of creating RAID-1 volumes wheninstalling

Chapter 9, “Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)During Installation (Overview),” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning forInstallation and Upgrade

For in-depth information about other complex SolarisVolume Manager configurations that are notsupported if you are using Solaris Live Upgrade

Chapter 2, “Storage Management Concepts,” in SolarisVolume Manager Administration Guide

Mapping Solaris Volume Manager Tasks to Solaris Live UpgradeSolaris Live Upgrade manages a subset of Solaris Volume Manager tasks. Table 2–1 shows theSolaris Volume Manager components that Solaris Live Upgrade can manage.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=mirroroverview-1




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=storage-overview-1


TABLE 2–1 Classes of Volumes

Term Description

concatenation A RAID-0 volume. If slices are concatenated, the data is written to the first availableslice until that slice is full. When that slice is full, the data is written to the next slice,serially. A concatenation provides no data redundancy unless it is contained in amirror.

mirror A RAID-1 volume. See RAID-1 volume.

RAID-1 volume A class of volume that replicates data by maintaining multiple copies. A RAID-1volume is sometimes called a mirror. A RAID-1 volume is composed of one or moreRAID-0 volumes that are called submirrors.

RAID-0 volume A class of volume that can be a stripe or a concatenation. These components are alsocalled submirrors. A stripe or concatenation is the basic building block for mirrors.

state database A state database stores information about disk about the state of your SolarisVolume Manager configuration. The state database is a collection of multiple,replicated database copies. Each copy is referred to as a state database replica. Thestate database tracks the location and status of all known state database replicas.

state database replica A copy of a state database. The replica ensures that the data in the database is valid.

submirror See RAID-0 volume.

volume A group of physical slices or other volumes that appear to the system as a singlelogical device. A volume is functionally identical to a physical disk in the view of anapplication or file system. In some command-line utilities, a volume is called ametadevice.

Examples of Using Solaris Live Upgrade to Create RAID-1 VolumesThe following examples present command syntax for creating RAID-1 volumes for a new bootenvironment.

Create RAID-1 Volume on Two Physical Disks

Figure 2–5 shows a new boot environment with a RAID-1 volume (mirror) that is created ontwo physical disks. The following command created the new boot environment and the mirror.

# lucreate -n second_disk -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d30:mirror,ufs \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d31:attach -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d32:attach \

-m -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:swap -m -:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s1:swap

This command performs the following tasks:

■ Creates a new boot environment, second_disk.■ Creates a mirror d30 and configures a UFS file system.



■ Creates a single-device concatenation on slice 0 of each physical disk. The concatenationsare named d31 and d32.

■ Adds the two concatenations to mirror d30.■ Copies the root (/) file system to the mirror.■ Configures files systems for swap on slice 1 of each physical disk.

FIGURE 2–5 Create a Boot Environment and Create a Mirror

hdisk1c0t1d0

hdisk0c0t0d0

hdisk2c0t2d0

d30 – RAID-1 volume (mirror)d31 – Single-slice concatenation (submirror)d32 – Single-slice concatenation (submirror)

/swap /swap

d30

root (/)

d31

/swap

root (/) root (/)

d32

/swap

root (/)

hdisk0c0t0d0

hdisk1c0t1d0

hdisk0c0t2d0

Original system with 3 physical disks

Copy

Create a New Boot Environment With a Mirror

New boot environment second_disk

Command: lucreate -n second_disk -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d30:mirror,ufs \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d31:attach \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d32:attach \ -m -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:swap -m -:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s1:swap



Create a Boot Environment and Use the Existing Submirror

Figure 2–6 shows a new boot environment that contains a RAID-1 volume (mirror). Thefollowing command created the new boot environment and the mirror.

# lucreate -n second_disk -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d20:ufs,mirror \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:detach,attach,preserve

This command performs the following tasks:

■ Creates a new boot environment, second_disk.■ Breaks mirror d10 and detaches concatenation d12.■ Preserves the contents of concatenation d12. File systems are not copied.■ Creates a new mirror d20. You now have two one-way mirrors d10 and d20.■ Attaches concatenation d12 to mirror d20.



FIGURE 2–6 Create a Boot Environment and Use the Existing Submirror

hdisk0c0t0d0

hdisk1c0t1d0

d10 – RAID-1 volume (mirror)d11 – Single-slice concatenation (submirror)d12 – Single-slice concatenation (submirror)d20 – New RAID-1 volume (mirror)

/swap /swap

d10

root (/)

d11

root (/)

d12

hdisk0c0t0d0

hdisk1c0t1d0

/swap /swap

d20

root (/)

d12

d10

root (/)

d11

Original system with 2 physical disks

– Breaks mirror and no copy– Creates submirror

Create a New Boot Environment and Use the Existing Submirror

New boot environmentsecond_disk

Command: lucreate -n second_disk -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d20:ufs,mirror \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:detach,attach,preserve



Upgrading a Boot EnvironmentAfter you have created a boot environment, you can perform an upgrade on the bootenvironment. As part of that upgrade, the boot environment can contain RAID-1 volumes(mirrors) for any file systems. Or the boot environment can have non-global zones installed.The upgrade does not affect any files in the active boot environment. When you are ready, youactivate the new boot environment, which then becomes the current boot environment.

Note – Starting with the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release, the upgrade process is impacted byAuto Registration. See “Auto Registration Impact for Live Upgrade” on page 36.

For procedures about upgrading a boot environmentfor UFS file systems

Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade(Tasks)”

For an example of upgrading a boot environment witha RAID–1 volume file system for UFS file systems

“Example of Detaching and Upgrading One Side of aRAID-1 Volume (Mirror)” on page 165

For procedures about upgrading with non-globalzones for UFS file systems

Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Solaris OS on a SystemWith Non-Global Zones Installed”

For upgrading ZFS file systems or migrating to a ZFSfile system

Chapter 11, “Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS(Overview)”

Figure 2–7 shows an upgrade to an inactive boot environment.



Rather than an upgrade, you can install a Solaris Flash archive on a boot environment. TheSolaris Flash installation feature enables you to create a single reference installation of theSolaris OS on a system. This system is called the master system. Then, you can replicate thatinstallation on a number of systems that are called clone systems. In this situation, the inactive

FIGURE 2–7 Upgrading an Inactive Boot Environment

Upgrading a Boot Environment


Inactive release YCritical file systems root (/) /usr /opt

Shared file systems

One hard disk

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Activate

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/) 0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Activate

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Copy

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Single disk command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s3:ufs -m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs \-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s5:ufs \-n solenv2

Two disks command:# lucreate -c solenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s3:ufs -m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s4:ufs \-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s5:ufs-n solenv2

# luupgrade -u -n solenv2 \-s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/OS_image

Upgrade

Release Y

Copy1 1

2 Upgrade

Release Y

2

3 3

1

1

2



boot environment is a clone. When you install the Solaris Flash archive on a system, the archivereplaces all the files on the existing boot environment as an initial installation would.

For procedures about installing a Solaris Flash archive, see “Installing Solaris Flash Archives ona Boot Environment” on page 105.

The following figures show an installation of a Solaris Flash archive on an inactive bootenvironment. Figure 2–8 shows a system with a single hard disk. Figure 2–9 shows a systemwith two hard disks.

FIGURE 2–8 Installing a Solaris Flash Archive on a Single Disk

Current release XCritical file systems root (/)

Inactive release YCritical file systems root (/) /usr /opt

Shared file systems

Installing a Solaris Flash Archive – Single Disk

Command:# lucreate -s - \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s3:ufs -n solenv2

# luupgrade -f -n solenv2 \-s /net/installmachine/export \/Solaris/OS_image \ -a /net/server/archive/Solaris

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Preserveslice

Create an Empty BootEnvironment

1

root (/)

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)

InstallFlash

archive

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Upgrade by Installinga Flash archive

2



Auto Registration Impact for Live UpgradeStarting with the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release, the upgrade process is impacted by AutoRegistration.

What is Auto Registration?

When you install or upgrade a system, configuration data about that system is, on rebooting,automatically communicated through the existing service tag technology to the Oracle ProductRegistration System. This service tag data about your system is used, for example, to help Oracleenhance customer support and services. You can use this same configuration data to create andmanage your own inventory of your systems.

FIGURE 2–9 Installing a Solaris Flash Archive on Two Disks

Installing a Solaris Flash Archive – Two Disks



Shared file systems

Preserveslice

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Create an Empty BootEnvironment

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

/swap

root (/) root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Upgrade by Installinga Flash archive

InstallFlash

archive

Command:# lucreate -s - \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0 -n solenv2

# luupgrade -f -n solenv2 \-s /net/installmachine/export \/Solaris/OS_image \ -a /net/server/archive/Solaris



For an introduction to Auto Registration, see “What’s New in the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Releasefor Installation” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning for Installation andUpgrade.

When Does Auto Registration Impact Live Upgrade?

Auto Registration does not change Live Upgrade procedures unless you are specificallyupgrading a system from a prior release to the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release or a later release.

Auto Registration does not change any of the following Live Upgrade procedures.

■ Installing a Solaris Flash archive■ Adding or removing patches or packages■ Testing a profile■ Checking package integrity

When, and only when, you are upgrading a system from a prior release to the Oracle Solaris 109/10 release or to a later release, you must create an Auto Registration configuration file. Then,when you upgrade that system, you must use the -k option in the luupgrade -u command,pointing to this configuration file. See the following procedure.

▼ How to Provide Auto Registration Information During an UpgradeWhen, and only when, you are upgrading a prior release to the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release orto a later release, use this procedure to provide required Auto Registration information duringthe upgrade.

Using a text editor, create a configuration file that contains your support credentials and,optionally, your proxy information.This file is formatted as a list of keyword-value pairs. Include the following keywords andvalues, in this format, in the file.http_proxy=Proxy-Server-Host-Name

http_proxy_port=Proxy-Server-Port-Number

http_proxy_user=HTTP-Proxy-User-Name

http_proxy_pw=HTTP-Proxy-Password

oracle_user=My-Oracle-Support-User-Name

oracle_pw=My-Oracle-Support-Password

Note – Follow these formatting rules.

■ The passwords must be in plain, not encrypted, text.■ Keyword order does not matter.■ Keywords can be entirely omitted if you do not want to specify a value. Or, you can retain

the keyword, and its value can be left blank.

1



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=gjzkl



Note – If you omit the support credentials, the registration will be anonymous.

■ Whitespaces in the configuration file do not matter, unless the value you want to entershould contain a space. Only http_proxy_user and http_proxy_pw values can contain aspace within the value.

■ The oracle_pw value must not contain a space.

See the following example.

http_proxy= webcache.central.example.COM

http_proxy_port=8080

http_proxy_user=webuser

http_proxy_pw=secret1

[email protected]

oracle_pw=csdfl2442IJS

Save the file.

Run the luupgrade -u -k /path/filename command, including any of the other standardluupgrade command options as needed for that particular upgrade.

▼ How to Disable Auto Registration During an Upgrade

Create or revise the content of the configuration file described in the prior instructions. In orderto disable Auto Registration, this configuration file should contain only the following line:autoreg=disable

Save the file.

Run the luupgrade -u -k /path/filename command, including any of the other standardluupgrade command options as needed for that particular upgrade.

Optional: When the Live Upgrade has completed, and the system reboots, you can verify thatthe Auto Registration feature is disabled as follows.# regadm status

Solaris Auto-Registration is currently disabled

Activating a Boot EnvironmentWhen you are ready to switch and make the new boot environment active, you quickly activatethe new boot environment and reboot. Files are synchronized between boot environments thefirst time that you boot a newly created boot environment. “Synchronize” means that certain

2

3

1

2

3

4



system files and directories are copied from the last-active boot environment to the bootenvironment being booted. When you reboot the system, the configuration that you installedon the new boot environment is active. The original boot environment then becomes aninactive boot environment.

For procedures about activating a boot environment “Activating a Boot Environment” on page 110

For information about synchronizing the active andinactive boot environment

“Synchronizing Files Between Boot Environments” onpage 54

Figure 2–10 shows a switch after a reboot from an inactive to an active boot environment.



Falling Back to the Original Boot EnvironmentIf a failure occurs, you can quickly fall back to the original boot environment with an activationand reboot. The use of fallback takes only the time to reboot the system, which is much quickerthan backing up and restoring the original. The new boot environment that failed to boot ispreserved. The failure can then be analyzed. You can only fall back to the boot environment thatwas used by luactivate to activate the new boot environment.

You fall back to the previous boot environment the following ways:

FIGURE 2–10 Activating an Inactive Boot Environment

Activating a Boot Environment

Current release YCritical file systems root (/) /usr /opt


Shared file systems

One hard disk

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Fallback if needed

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Commands:# luactivate solenv2# init 6

Activate

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

Fallback if needed

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Activate



Problem Action

The new boot environment bootssuccessfully, but you are not happywith the results.

Run the luactivate command with the name of the previous bootenvironment and reboot.

x86 only – Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, you can fall back byselecting the original boot environment that is found on the GRUBmenu. The original boot environment and the new boot environmentmust be based on the GRUB software. Booting from the GRUB menudoes not synchronize files between the old and new boot environments.For more information about synchronizing files, see “Forcing aSynchronization Between Boot Environments” on page 55.

The new boot environment doesnot boot.

Boot the fallback boot environment in single-user mode, run theluactivate command, and reboot.

You cannot boot in single-usermode.

Perform one of the following:■ Boot from DVD or CD media or a net installation image■ Mount the root (/) file system on the fallback boot environment■ Run the luactivate command and reboot

For procedures to fall back, see Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the Original BootEnvironment (Tasks).”

Figure 2–11 shows the switch that is made when you reboot to fallback.



Maintaining a Boot EnvironmentYou can also do various maintenance activities such as checking status, renaming, or deleting aboot environment. For maintenance procedures, see Chapter 7, “Maintaining Solaris LiveUpgrade Boot Environments (Tasks).”

FIGURE 2–11 Fallback to the Original Boot Environment

Fallback to Original Boot Environment



Shared file systems

Fallback

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Two hard disks

/swap

root (/)0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Command:# luactivate solenv1# init 6

One hard disk

/export1

/opt

/usr

root (/)

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/) 0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Fallback



Solaris Live Upgrade (Planning)

This chapter provides guidelines and requirements for review before installing and usingSolaris Live Upgrade. You also should review general information about upgrading in“Upgrade Planning” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning for Installation andUpgrade.

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. For planninginformation for migrating a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFSroot pool, see Chapter 12, “Solaris Live Upgrade for ZFS (Planning).”

This chapter contains the following sections:■ “Solaris Live Upgrade Requirements” on page 43■ “Upgrading a System With Packages or Patches” on page 47■ “Guidelines for Creating File Systems With the lucreate Command” on page 48■ “Guidelines for Selecting Slices for File Systems” on page 49■ “Customizing a New Boot Environment's Content” on page 53■ “Synchronizing Files Between Boot Environments” on page 54

Solaris Live Upgrade RequirementsBefore you install and use Solaris Live Upgrade, become familiar with these requirements.

Solaris Live Upgrade System RequirementsSolaris Live Upgrade is included in the Solaris software. You need to install the Solaris LiveUpgrade packages on your current OS. The release of the Solaris Live Upgrade packages mustmatch the release of the OS you are upgrading to. For example, if your current OS is the Solaris9 release and you want to upgrade to the Solaris 10 9/10 release, you need to install the SolarisLive Upgrade packages from the Solaris 10 9/10 release.

3C H A P T E R 3

43

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=emyaq

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=emyaq

Table 3–1 lists releases that are supported by Solaris Live Upgrade.

TABLE 3–1 Supported Solaris Releases

Your Current Release Compatible Upgrade Release

Solaris 8 OS Solaris 8, 9, or any Solaris 10 release

Solaris 9 OS Solaris 9 or any Solaris 10 release

Solaris 10 OS Any Solaris 10 release

Installing Solaris Live UpgradeYou can install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages by using the following:

■ The pkgadd command. The Solaris Live Upgrade packages are SUNWlucfg, SUNWlur, andSUNWluu, and these packages must be installed in that order.

■ An installer on the Solaris Operating System DVD, the Solaris Software - 2 CD, or a networkinstallation image.

Be aware that the following patches might need to be installed for the correct operation ofSolaris Live Upgrade.

Description For More Information

Caution: Correct operation of Solaris Live Upgrade requires thata limited set of patch revisions be installed for a particular OSversion. Before installing or running Solaris Live Upgrade, youare required to install these patches.

x86 only – If this set of patches is not installed, Solaris Live Upgradefails and you might see the following error message. If you don'tsee the following error message, necessary patches still might notbe installed. Always verify that all patches listed on the SunSolveInfodoc have been installed before attempting to install SolarisLive Upgrade.

ERROR: Cannot find or is not executable:

</sbin/biosdev>.

ERROR: One or more patches required

by Live Upgrade has not been installed.

The patches listed in Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) are subjectto change at any time. These patches potentially fix defects inSolaris Live Upgrade, as well as fix defects in components thatSolaris Live Upgrade depends on. If you experience anydifficulties with Solaris Live Upgrade, please check and make surethat you have the latest Solaris Live Upgrade patches installed.

Ensure that you have the most recently updated patch list byconsulting http://sunsolve.sun.com. Search for the Infodoc206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

Solaris Live Upgrade Requirements


http://sunsolve.sun.com


If you are running the Solaris 8 or 9 OS, you might not be able torun the Solaris Live Upgrade installer. These releases do notcontain the set of patches needed to run the Java 2 runtimeenvironment. You must have the recommended patch cluster forthe Java 2 runtime environment recommended to run the SolarisLive Upgrade installer and install the packages.

To install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages, use the pkgaddcommand. Or install, for the Java 2 runtime environment, therecommended patch cluster. The patch cluster is available onhttp://sunsolve.sun.com.

For instructions about installing the Solaris Live Upgrade software, see “Installing Solaris LiveUpgrade” on page 60.

Required PackagesIf you have problems with Solaris Live Upgrade, you might be missing packages. In thefollowing table, check that your OS has the listed packages , which are required to use SolarisLive Upgrade.

For the Solaris 10 release:

■ If you install one of the following software groups, these software groups contain all therequired Solaris Live Upgrade packages.■ Entire Solaris Software Group Plus OEM Support■ Entire Solaris Software Group■ Developer Solaris Software Group■ End User Solaris Software Group

■ If you install one of these Software Groups, then you might not have all the packagesrequired to use Solaris Live Upgrade.■ Core System Support Software Group■ Reduced Network Support Software Group

For information about software groups, see “Disk Space Recommendations for SoftwareGroups” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade.

TABLE 3–2 Required Packages for Solaris Live Upgrade

Solaris 8 Release Solaris 9 Release Solaris 10 Release

SUNWadmap SUNWadmap SUNWadmap

SUNWadmc SUNWadmc SUNWadmlib-sysid

SUNWlibC SUNWadmfw SUNWadmr

SUNWbzip SUNWlibC SUNWlibC

SUNWgzip SUNWgzip For Solaris 10 3/05 only:SUNWgzip


Chapter 3 • Solaris Live Upgrade (Planning) 45


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimo

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimo

TABLE 3–2 Required Packages for Solaris Live Upgrade (Continued)Solaris 8 Release Solaris 9 Release Solaris 10 Release

SUNWj2rt

Note – The SUNWj2rt package isneeded only under the followingconditions:■ When you run the Solaris Live

Upgrade installer to add SolarisLive Upgrade packages

■ When you upgrade and use CDmedia

SUNWj2rt




SUNWj5rt




To check for packages on your system, type the following command.

% pkginfo package_name

Solaris Live Upgrade Disk Space RequirementsFollow general disk space requirements for an upgrade. See Chapter 4, “System Requirements,Guidelines, and Upgrade (Planning),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning forInstallation and Upgrade.

To estimate the file system size that is needed to create a boot environment, start the creation ofa new boot environment. The size is calculated. You can then abort the process.

The disk on the new boot environment must be able to serve as a boot device. Some systemsrestrict which disks can serve as a boot device. Refer to your system's documentation todetermine if any boot restrictions apply.

The disk might need to be prepared before you create the new boot environment. Check thatthe disk is formatted properly:

■ Identify slices large enough to hold the file systems to be copied.■ Identify file systems that contain directories that you want to share between boot

environments rather than copy. If you want a directory to be shared, you need to create anew boot environment with the directory put on its own slice. The directory is then a filesystem and can be shared with future boot environments. For more information aboutcreating separate file systems for sharing, see “Guidelines for Selecting Slices for ShareableFile Systems” on page 52.






Solaris Live Upgrade Requirements if Creating RAID-1Volumes (Mirrors)Solaris Live Upgrade uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create a boot environmentthat can contain file systems that are RAID-1 volumes (mirrors). Solaris Live Upgrade does notimplement the full functionality of Solaris Volume Manager, but does require the followingcomponents of Solaris Volume Manager.

TABLE 3–3 Required Components for Solaris Live Upgrade and RAID-1 Volumes

Requirement Description For More Information

You must create at leastone state database and atleast three state databasereplicas.

A state database stores information about disk about thestate of your Solaris Volume Manager configuration. Thestate database is a collection of multiple, replicateddatabase copies. Each copy is referred to as a state databasereplica. When a state database is copied, the replicaprotects against data loss from single points of failure.

For information about creating a statedatabase, see Chapter 6, “State Database(Overview),” in Solaris Volume ManagerAdministration Guide.

Solaris Live Upgradesupports only a RAID-1volume (mirror) withsingle-slice concatenationson the root (/) file system.

A concatenation is a RAID-0 volume. If slices areconcatenated, the data is written to the first available sliceuntil that slice is full. When that slice is full, the data iswritten to the next slice, serially. A concatenation providesno data redundancy unless it is contained in a RAID-1volume

A RAID—1 volume can be comprised of a maximum ofthree concatenations.

For guidelines about creating mirrored filesystems, see “Guidelines for Selecting Slicesfor Mirrored File Systems” on page 50.

Upgrading a System With Packages or PatchesYou can use Solaris Live Upgrade to add patches and packages to a system. When you useSolaris Live Upgrade, the only downtime the system incurs is that of a reboot. You can addpatches and packages to a new boot environment with the luupgrade command. When you useluupgrade command, you can also use a Solaris Flash archive to install patches or packages.

Caution – When upgrading and adding and removing packages or patches, Solaris Live Upgraderequires packages or patches that comply with the SVR4 advanced packaging guidelines. WhileSun packages conform to these guidelines, Sun cannot guarantee the conformance of packagesfrom third-party vendors. If a package violates these guidelines, the package can cause thepackage-addition software during an upgrade to fail or alter the active boot environment.

For more information about packaging requirements, see Appendix B, “Additional SVR4Packaging Requirements (Reference).”

Upgrading a System With Packages or Patches


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=about-state-db-replicas-1



Type of Installation Description For More Information

Adding patches to a bootenvironment

Create a new boot environment and use theluupgrade command with the -t option.

“To Add Patches to a Network Installation Imageon a Boot Environment” on page 96

Adding packages to a bootenvironment

Use the luupgrade command with the -p option. “To Add Packages to a Network Installation Imageon a Boot Environment” on page 94

Using Solaris Live Upgradeto install a Solaris Flasharchive

An archive contains a complete copy of a bootenvironment with new packages and patchesalready included. This copy can be installed onmultiple systems.

■ For details about how to create a Solaris Flasharchive, see Chapter 3, “Creating Solaris FlashArchives (Tasks),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives(Creation and Installation)

■ For information about using Solaris LiveUpgrade to install a Solaris Flash archive, see“Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a BootEnvironment” on page 105

Upgrading and Patching LimitationsFor upgrading and patching limitations, see “Upgrading and Patching Limitations” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade.

Guidelines for Creating File Systems With the lucreateCommand

The lucreate -m option specifies which file systems and the number of file systems to becreated in the new boot environment. You must specify the exact number of file systems youwant to create by repeating this option. When using the -m option to create file systems, followthese guidelines:

■ You must specify one -m option for the root (/) file system for the new boot environment. Ifyou run lucreate without the -m option, the Configuration menu is displayed. TheConfiguration menu enables you to customize the new boot environment by redirectingfiles onto new mount points.

■ Any critical file systems that exist in the current boot environment and that are not specifiedin a -m option are merged into the next highest-level file system created.

■ Only the file systems that are specified by the -m option are created on the new bootenvironment. To create the same number of files systems that is on your current system, youmust specify one -m option for each file system to be created.

Upgrading and Patching Limitations


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1912&id=flashcreate-1




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimr

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimr

For example, a single use of the -m option specifies where to put all the file systems. Youmerge all the file systems from the original boot environment into the one file system that isspecified by the -m option. If you specify the -m option twice, you create two file systems. Ifyou have file systems for root (/), /opt, and /var, you would use one -m option for each filesystem on the new boot environment.

■ Do not duplicate a mount point. For example, you cannot have two root (/) file systems.

Guidelines for Selecting Slices for File SystemsWhen you create file systems for a boot environment, the rules are identical to the rules forcreating file systems for the Solaris OS. Solaris Live Upgrade cannot prevent you from creatinginvalid configurations for critical file systems. For example, you could type a lucreatecommand that would create separate file systems for root (/) and /kernel which is an invaliddivision of the root (/) file system.

Do not overlap slices when reslicing disks. If this condition exists, the new boot environmentappears to have been created, but when activated, the boot environment does not boot. Theoverlapping file systems might be corrupted.

For Solaris Live Upgrade to work properly, the vfstab file on the active boot environment musthave valid contents and must have an entry for the root (/) file system at the minimum.

Guidelines for Selecting a Slice for the root (/) FileSystemWhen you create an inactive boot environment, you need to identify a slice where the root (/)file system is to be copied. Use the following guidelines when you select a slice for the root (/)file system. The slice must comply with the following:

■ Must be a slice from which the system can boot.■ Must meet the recommended minimum size.■ Can be on different physical disks or the same disk as the active root (/) file system.■ Can be a Veritas Volume Manager volume (VxVM). If VxVM volumes are configured on

your current system, the lucreate command can create a new boot environment. When thedata is copied to the new boot environment, the Veritas file system configuration is lost anda UFS file system is created on the new boot environment.

Guidelines for Selecting Slices for File Systems


Guidelines for Selecting Slices for Mirrored FileSystemsYou can create a new boot environment that contains any combination of physical disk slices,Solaris Volume Manager volumes, or Veritas Volume Manager volumes. Critical file systemsthat are copied to the new boot environment can be of the following types:

■ A physical slice.■ A single-slice concatenation that is included in a RAID-1 volume (mirror). The slice that

contains the root (/) file system can be a RAID-1 volume.■ A single-slice concatenation that is included in a RAID-0 volume. The slice that contains the

root (/) file system can be a RAID-0 volume.

When you create a new boot environment, the lucreate -m command recognizes the followingthree types of devices:

■ A physical slice in the form of /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz■ A Solaris Volume Manager volume in the form of /dev/md/dsk/dnum■ A Veritas Volume Manager volume in the form of /dev/vx/dsk/volume_name. If VxVM

volumes are configured on your current system, the lucreate command can create a newboot environment. When the data is copied to the new boot environment, the Veritas filesystem configuration is lost and a UFS file system is created on the new boot environment.

Note – If you have problems upgrading with Veritas VxVM, see “System Panics WhenUpgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade Running Veritas VxVm” on page 233.

General Guidelines When Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrored) FileSystemsUse the following guidelines to check if a RAID-1 volume is busy, resyncing, or if volumescontain file systems that are in use by a Solaris Live Upgrade boot environment.

For volume naming guidelines, see “RAID Volume Name Requirements and Guidelines forCustom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Planning for Installation and Upgrade.

Checking Status of Volumes

If a mirror or submirror needs maintenance or is busy, components cannot be detached. Youshould use the metastat command before creating a new boot environment and using thedetach keyword. The metastat command checks if the mirror is in the process ofresynchronization or if the mirror is in use. For information, see the man page metastat(1M).



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=epudh



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=metastat-1m

Detaching Volumes and Resynchronizing Mirrors

If you use the detach keyword to detach a submirror, lucreate checks if a device is currentlyresyncing. If the device is resyncing, you cannot detach the submirror and you see an errormessage.

Resynchronization is the process of copying data from one submirror to another submirrorafter the following problems:

■ Submirror failures.■ System crashes.■ A submirror has been taken offline and brought back online.■ The addition of a new submirror.

For more information about resynchronization, see “RAID-1 Volume (Mirror)Resynchronization” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

Using Solaris Volume Manager Commands

Use the lucreate command rather than Solaris Volume Manager commands to manipulatevolumes on inactive boot environments. The Solaris Volume Manager software has noknowledge of boot environments, whereas the lucreate command contains checks thatprevent you from inadvertently destroying a boot environment. For example, lucreateprevents you from overwriting or deleting a Solaris Volume Manager volume.

However, if you have already used Solaris Volume Manager software to create complex SolarisVolume Manager concatenations, stripes, and mirrors, you must use Solaris Volume Managersoftware to manipulate them. Solaris Live Upgrade is aware of these components and supportstheir use. Before using Solaris Volume Manager commands that can create, modify, or destroyvolume components, use the lustatus or lufslist commands. These commands candetermine which Solaris Volume Manager volumes contain file systems that are in use by aSolaris Live Upgrade boot environment.

Guidelines for Selecting a Slice for a Swap VolumeThese guidelines contain configuration recommendations and examples for a swap slice.

Configuring Swap for the New Boot EnvironmentYou can configure a swap slice in three ways by using the lucreate command with the -moption:

■ If you do not specify a swap slice, the swap slices belonging to the current boot environmentare configured for the new boot environment.

■ If you specify one or more swap slices, these slices are the only swap slices that are used bythe new boot environment. The two boot environments do not share any swap slices.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=about-metadevices-25868

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=about-metadevices-25868

■ You can specify to both share a swap slice and add a new slice for swap.

The following examples show the three ways of configuring swap. The current bootenvironment is configured with the root (/) file system on c0t0d0s0. The swap file system is onc0t0d0s1.

■ In the following example, no swap slice is specified. The new boot environment contains theroot (/) file system on c0t1d0s0. Swap is shared between the current and new bootenvironment on c0t0d0s1.

# lucreate -n be2 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs

■ In the following example, a swap slice is specified. The new boot environment contains theroot (/) file system on c0t1d0s0. A new swap file system is created on c0t1d0s1. No swapslice is shared between the current and new boot environment.

# lucreate -n be2 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs -m -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:swap

■ In the following example, a swap slice is added and another swap slice is shared between thetwo boot environments. The new boot environment contains the root (/) file system onc0t1d0s0. A new swap slice is created on c0t1d0s1. The swap slice on c0t0d0s1 is sharedbetween the current and new boot environment.

# lucreate -n be2 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs -m -:shared:swap \

-m -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:swap

Failed Boot Environment Creation if Swap is in UseA boot environment creation fails if the swap slice is being used by any boot environmentexcept for the current boot environment. If the boot environment was created using the -soption, the alternate-source boot environment can use the swap slice, but not any other bootenvironment.

Guidelines for Selecting Slices for Shareable FileSystemsSolaris Live Upgrade copies the entire contents of a slice to the designated new bootenvironment slice. You might want some large file systems on that slice to be shared betweenboot environments rather than copied to conserve space and copying time. File systems that arecritical to the OS such as root (/) and /var must be copied. File systems such as /home are notcritical file systems and could be shared between boot environments. Shareable file systemsmust be user-defined file systems and on separate swap slices on both the active and new bootenvironments. You can reconfigure the disk several ways, depending your needs.



Reconfiguring a disk Examples For More Information

You can reslice the disk before creating the newboot environment and put the shareable file systemon its own slice.

For example, if the root (/) file system, /var, and/home are on the same slice, reconfigure the disk andput /home on its own slice. When you create any newboot environments, /home is shared with the newboot environment by default.

format(1M)

If you want to share a directory, the directory mustbe split off to its own slice. The directory is then afile system that can be shared with another bootenvironment. You can use the lucreate commandwith the -m option to create a new bootenvironment and split a directory off to its ownslice. But, the new file system cannot yet be sharedwith the original boot environment. You need torun the lucreate command with the -m optionagain to create another boot environment. The twonew boot environments can then share thedirectory.

For example, if you wanted to upgrade from theSolaris 9 release to the Solaris 10 9/10 release andshare /home, you could run the lucreate commandwith the -m option. You could create a Solaris 9 releasewith /home as a separate file system on its own slice.Then run the lucreate command with the -m optionagain to duplicate that boot environment. This thirdboot environment can then be upgraded to the Solaris10 9/10 release. /home is shared between the Solaris 9and Solaris 10 9/10 releases.

For a description ofshareable and critical filesystems, see “File SystemTypes” on page 22.

Customizing a New Boot Environment's ContentWhen you create a new boot environment, some directories and files can be excluded from acopy to the new boot environment. If you have excluded a directory, you can also reinstatespecified subdirectories or files under the excluded directory. These subdirectories or files thathave been restored are then copied to the new boot environment. For example, you couldexclude from the copy all files and directories in /etc/mail, but include all files and directoriesin /etc/mail/staff. The following command copies the staff subdirectory to the new bootenvironment.

# lucreate -n second_disk -x /etc/mail -y /etc/mail/staff

Caution – Use the file-exclusion options with caution. Do not remove files or directories that arerequired by the system.

The following table lists the lucreate command options for removing and restoring directoriesand files.

How Specified? Exclude Options Include Options

Specify the name of the directory orfile

-x exclude_dir -y include_dir

Customizing a New Boot Environment's Content


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=format-1m

How Specified? Exclude Options Include Options

Use a file that contains a list -f list_filename

-z list_filename

-Y list_filename

-z list_filename

For examples of customizing the directories and files when creating a boot environment, see“To Create a Boot Environment and Customize the Content” on page 84.

Synchronizing Files Between Boot EnvironmentsWhen you are ready to switch and make the new boot environment active, you quickly activatethe new boot environment and reboot. Files are synchronized between boot environments thefirst time that you boot a newly created boot environment. “Synchronize” means that certaincritical system files and directories might be copied from the last-active boot environment tothe boot environment being booted. Those files and directories that have changed are copied.

Adding Files to the /etc/lu/synclistSolaris Live Upgrade checks for critical files that have changed. If these files' content is not thesame in both boot environments, they are copied from the active boot environment to the newboot environment. Synchronizing is meant for critical files such as /etc/passwd or /etc/groupfiles that might have changed since the new boot environment was created.

The /etc/lu/synclist file contains a list of directories and files that are synchronized. In someinstances, you might want to copy other files from the active boot environment to the new bootenvironment. You can add directories and files to /etc/lu/synclist if necessary.

Adding files not listed in the /etc/lu/synclist could cause a system to become unbootable.The synchronization process only copies files and creates directories. The process does notremove files and directories.

The following example of the /etc/lu/synclist file shows the standard directories and filesthat are synchronized for this system.

/var/mail OVERWRITE

/var/spool/mqueue OVERWRITE

/var/spool/cron/crontabs OVERWRITE

/var/dhcp OVERWRITE

/etc/passwd OVERWRITE

/etc/shadow OVERWRITE

/etc/opasswd OVERWRITE

/etc/oshadow OVERWRITE

/etc/group OVERWRITE

/etc/pwhist OVERWRITE

Synchronizing Files Between Boot Environments


/etc/default/passwd OVERWRITE

/etc/dfs OVERWRITE

/var/log/syslog APPEND

/var/adm/messages APPEND

Examples of directories and files that might be appropriate to add to the synclist file are thefollowing:

/var/yp OVERWRITE

/etc/mail OVERWRITE

/etc/resolv.conf OVERWRITE

/etc/domainname OVERWRITE

The synclist file entries can be files or directories. The second field is the method of updatingthat occurs on the activation of the boot environment. You can choose from three methods toupdate files:

■ OVERWRITE – The contents of the active boot environment's file overwrites the contentsof the new boot environment file. OVERWRITE is the default action if no action is specifiedin the second field. If the entry is a directory, all subdirectories are copied. All files areoverwritten. The new boot environment file has the same date, mode, and ownership as thesame file on the previous boot environment.

■ APPEND – The contents of the active boot environment's file are added to the end of thenew boot environment's file. This addition might lead to duplicate entries in the file.Directories cannot be listed as APPEND. The new boot environment file has the same date,mode, and ownership as the same file on the previous boot environment.

■ PREPEND – The contents of the active boot environment's file are added to the beginningof the new boot environment's file. This addition might lead to duplicate entries in the file.Directories can not be listed as PREPEND. The new boot environment file has the samedate, mode, and ownership as the same file on the previous boot environment.

Forcing a Synchronization Between BootEnvironmentsThe first time you boot from a newly created boot environment, Solaris Live Upgradesynchronizes the new boot environment with the boot environment that was last active. Afterthis initial boot and synchronization, Solaris Live Upgrade does not perform a synchronizationunless requested. To force a synchronization, you use the luactivate command with the -soption.

You might want to force a synchronization if you are maintaining multiple versions of theSolaris OS. You might want changes in files such as email or passwd/group to be in the bootenvironment you are activating to. If you force a synchronization, Solaris Live Upgrade checksfor conflicts between files that are subject to synchronization. When the new boot environmentis booted and a conflict is detected, a warning is issued and the files are not synchronized.

Synchronizing Files Between Boot Environments


Activation can be completed successfully, despite such a conflict. A conflict can occur if youmake changes to the same file on both the new boot environment and the active bootenvironment. For example, you make changes to the /etc/passwd file on the original bootenvironment. Then you make other changes to /etc/passwd file on the new boot environment.The synchronization process cannot choose which file to copy for the synchronization.

Caution – Use this option with great care, because you might not be aware of or in control ofchanges that might have occurred in the last-active boot environment. For example, if you wererunning Solaris 10 9/10 software on your current boot environment and booted back to aSolaris 9 release with a forced synchronization, files could be changed on the Solaris 9 release.Because files are dependent on the release of the OS, the boot to the Solaris 9 release could failbecause the Solaris 10 9/10 files might not be compatible with the Solaris 9 files.

Booting Multiple Boot EnvironmentsIf your system has more than one OS installed on the system, you can boot from these bootenvironments for both SPARC and x86 platforms. The boot environments available for bootinginclude Solaris Live Upgrade inactive boot environments.

■ Starting with the Solaris 10 10/08 release for a SPARC based system, you can boot a ZFSroot file system in a ZFS pool. For ZFS root pools, you can list the available bootenvironments with the boot command with the -L option. You can then choose a bootenvironment and use the OBP boot command with the -Z option to boot that bootenvironment. The -Z option is an alternative for the luactivate command that is also usedto boot a new boot environment for a ZFS root pool. The luactivate command is thepreferred method of switching boot environments. For a UFS file system, you continue touse the OpenBoot PROM OBP as the primary administrative interface, with boot optionsselected by using OBP commands.

■ Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release for x86 based systems, a GRUB boot menuprovides the interface for booting between different boot environments. Starting with theSolaris 10 10/08 release, this menu lists ZFS boot environments that are available forbooting. If the default boot environment is a ZFS file system and the GRUB menu isdisplayed, you can let the default boot environment boot or choose another bootenvironment to boot. The GRUB menu is an alternative to using the luactivate commandthat is also used to boot a new boot environment for a ZFS root pool. The luactivate is thepreferred method of switching boot environments.

On both SPARC and x86 based systems, each ZFS root pool has a dataset designated as thedefault root file system. If for SPARC, you type the boot command or for x86, you take thedefault from the GRUB menu, then this default root file system is booted.

Booting Multiple Boot Environments


Note – If the GRUB menu has been explicitly modified to designate a default menu item otherthan the one set by Solaris Live Upgrade, then selecting that default menu entry might not resultin the booting of the pool's default root file system.

For more information about booting and modifying the GRUB boot menu, see the followingreferences.

Task Information

To activate a boot environment with the GRUB menu “x86: To Activate a Boot Environment With theGRUB Menu” on page 115

To fall back to the original boot environment with aGRUB menu

“x86: To Fall Back Despite Successful New BootEnvironment Activation With the GRUB Menu” onpage 121

For SPARC and x86 information and step-by-stepprocedures for booting and modifying boot behavior

System Administration Guide: Basic Administration■ Chapter 8, “Introduction to Shutting Down and

Booting a System,” in System AdministrationGuide: Basic Administration

■ Chapter 9, “Shutting Down and Booting a System(Overview),” in System Administration Guide:Basic Administration

■ Chapter 12, “Booting an Oracle Solaris System(Tasks),” in System Administration Guide: BasicAdministration

■ Chapter 11, “Modifying Oracle Solaris BootBehavior (Tasks),” in System AdministrationGuide: Basic Administration

■ Chapter 13, “Managing the Oracle Solaris BootArchives (Tasks),” in System AdministrationGuide: Basic Administration

For an overview and step-by-step procedures forbooting ZFS boot environments

“Booting From a ZFS Root File System” in OracleSolaris ZFS Administration Guide

Booting Multiple Boot Environments


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=sysadv1

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=hbintro-66644



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=hboverview-25463



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=hbsparcboot-79782



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=grubtasks-1



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=archive-123



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=ggpco

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=ggpco

Solaris Live Upgrade Character User InterfaceSun no longer recommends use of the lu command. The lu command displays a character userinterface (CUI). The underlying command sequence for the CUI, typically the lucreate,luupgrade, and luactivate commands, is straightforward to use. Procedures for thesecommands are provided in the following chapters.

Solaris Live Upgrade Character User Interface


Using Solaris Live Upgrade to Create a BootEnvironment (Tasks)

This chapter explains how to install Solaris Live Upgrade packages and patches and to create aboot environment.

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. For procedures formigrating a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFS root pool, seeChapter 13, “Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools.”

This chapter contains the following sections:

■ “Task Map: Installing Solaris Live Upgrade and Creating Boot Environments” on page 59■ “Installing Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 60■ “Creating a New Boot Environment” on page 64

Task Map: Installing Solaris Live Upgrade and Creating BootEnvironments

TABLE 4–1 Task Map: Using Solaris Live Upgrade

Task Description For Instructions

Install Solaris Live Upgradepackages

Install packages on your OS “Installing Solaris Live Upgrade”on page 60

Install patches on your system Solaris Live Upgrade requires alimited set of patch revisions

“Installing Patches Needed bySolaris Live Upgrade” on page 63

Create a boot environment Copy and reconfigure file systemsto an inactive boot environment

“Creating a New BootEnvironment” on page 64

4C H A P T E R 4

59

Installing Solaris Live UpgradeBefore running Solaris Live Upgrade, you must install the latest Solaris Live Upgrade packagesfrom installation media and install the patches listed in the SunSolve Infodoc 206844. You needto install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages on your current OS and remove old packages. Therelease of the Solaris Live Upgrade packages must match the release of the OS you areupgrading to. For example, if your current OS is the Solaris 9 release and you want to upgrade tothe Solaris 10 9/10 release, you need to install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from theSolaris 10 9/10 release. The patches listed in SunSolve Infodoc 206844 also need to be installed.The latest packages and patches ensure that you have all the latest bug fixes and new features inthe release. Ensure that you install all the patches that are relevant to your system beforeproceeding to create a new boot environment.

The SunSolve Infodoc 206844 describes how to remove old packages and install new packages,as well as lists the required patches. The procedures below provided more description for theprocedures described in Infodoc 206844.

■ “Installing Patches Needed by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 63■ “To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the pkgadd Command” on page 60■ “To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the Solaris Installation Program” on page 61

▼ To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the pkgaddCommandYou can install the packages by using the liveupgrade20 command that is on the installationDVD or CD or use the pkgadd command. The liveupgrade20 command requires Javasoftware. If your system does not have Java software installed, then you need to use the pkgaddcommand to install the packages. See the SunSolve Infodoc for more information.

Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Remove existing Solaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade or patch by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages includeexisting software, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages andinstall the new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading orpatching to the target release fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 108/07 release. If you are using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a release previous to Solaris10 8/07, you do not need to remove this package.# pkgrm SUNWlucfg SUNWluu SUNWlur

1

2

Installing Solaris Live Upgrade



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4557&id=rbactask-15

Install the packages in the following order.# pkgadd -d path_to_packages SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

path_to_packages Specifies the absolute path to the software packages.

Verify that the package has been installed successfully.# pkgchk -v SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

▼ To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the SolarisInstallation ProgramYou can install the packages by using the liveupgrade20 command that is on the installationDVD or CD. The liveupgrade20 command requires Java software. If your system does nothave Java software installed, then you need to use the pkgadd command to install the packages.See the SunSolve Infodoc for more information.

Note – This procedure assumes that the system is running Volume Manager. For detailedinformation about managing removable media with the Volume Manager, refer to SystemAdministration Guide: Devices and File Systems.


Remove existing Solaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade or patch by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages includeexisting software, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages andinstall the new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading orpatching to the target release fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 108/07 release. If you are using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a release previous to Solaris10 8/07, you do not need to remove this package.# pkgrm SUNWlucfg SUNWluu SUNWlur

Insert the Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software - 2 CD.

Run the installer for the media you are using.

■ If you are using the Solaris Operating System DVD, change directories to the installer andrun the installer.

3

4

1

2

3

4


Chapter 4 • Using Solaris Live Upgrade to Create a Boot Environment (Tasks) 61




# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/Solaris_10/Tools/Installers

# ./liveupgrade20

The Solaris installation program GUI is displayed. If you are using a script, you can preventthe GUI from displaying by using the -noconsole and -nodisplay options.

■ If you are using the Solaris Software - 2 CD, run the installer.

% ./installer

The Solaris installation program GUI is displayed.

From the Select Type of Install panel, click Custom.

On the Locale Selection panel, click the language to be installed.

Choose the software to install.

■ For DVD, on the Component Selection panel, click Next to install the packages.■ For CD, on the Product Selection panel, click Default Install for Solaris Live Upgrade and

click on the other software choices to deselect them.

Follow the directions on the Solaris installation program panels to install the software.You are ready to install the required patches.

5

6

7

8



Installing Patches Needed by Solaris Live Upgrade


Caution – Correct operation of Solaris Live Upgrade requires that alimited set of patch revisions be installed for a particular OSversion. Before installing or running Solaris Live Upgrade, youare required to install these patches.

x86 only – If this set of patches is not installed, Solaris Live Upgradefails and you might see the following error message. If you don'tsee the following error message, necessary patches still might notbe installed. Always verify that all patches listed on the SunSolveInfodoc have been installed before attempting to install SolarisLive Upgrade.

ERROR: Cannot find or is not

executable: </sbin/biosdev>.

ERROR: One or more patches required by

Live Upgrade has not been installed.

The patches listed in Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) are subjectto change at any time. These patches potentially fix defects inSolaris Live Upgrade, as well as fix defects in components thatSolaris Live Upgrade depends on. If you experience anydifficulties with Solaris Live Upgrade, please check and make surethat you have the latest Solaris Live Upgrade patches installed.

Ensure you have the most recently updated patch list byconsulting http://sunsolve.sun.com. Search for the Infodoc206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

If you are running the Solaris 8 or Solaris 9 OS, you might not beable to run the Solaris Live Upgrade installer. These releases donot contain the set of patches needed to run the Java 2 runtimeenvironment. You must have the recommended patch cluster forthe Java 2 runtime environment that is recommended to run theSolaris Live Upgrade installer and install the packages.

To install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages, use the pkgaddcommand. Or install, for the Java 2 runtime environment, therecommended patch cluster. The patch cluster is available athttp://sunsolve.sun.com.

▼ To Install Required Patches


If you are storing the patches on a local disk, create a directory such as /var/tmp/lupatches.

From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.

Change to the patch directory as in this example.# cd /var/tmp/lupatches

1

2

3

4






Install the patches with the patchadd command.# patchadd path_to_patches patch-id patch-id

patch-id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.

Note – The patches need to be applied in the order specified in infodoc 206844.

Reboot the system if necessary. Certain patches require a reboot to be effective.x86 only: Rebooting the system is required or Solaris Live Upgrade fails.# init 6

You now have the packages and patches necessary for a successful creation of a new bootenvironment.

Creating a New Boot EnvironmentCreating a boot environment provides a method of copying critical file systems from the activeboot environment to a new boot environment. The lucreate command enables reorganizing adisk if necessary, customizing file systems, and copying the critical file systems to the new bootenvironment.

Before file systems are copied to the new boot environment, they can be customized so thatcritical file system directories are either merged into their parent directory or split from theirparent directory. User-defined (shareable) file systems are shared between boot environmentsby default. But shareable file systems can be copied if needed. Swap, which is a shareablevolume, can be split and merged also. For an overview of critical and shareable file systems, see“File System Types” on page 22.


▼ To Create a Boot Environment for the First TimeThe lucreate command that is used with the -m option specifies which file systems and thenumber of file systems to be created in the new boot environment. You must specify the exactnumber of file systems you want to create by repeating this option. For example, a single use ofthe -m option specifies where to put all the file systems. You merge all the file systems from theoriginal boot environment into the one file system that is specified by the -m option. If youspecify the -m option twice, you create two file systems. When using the -m option to create filesystems, follow these guidelines:

5

6

Creating a New Boot Environment


■ You must specify one -m option for the root (/) file system for the new boot environment. Ifyou run lucreate without the -m option, the Configuration menu is displayed. TheConfiguration menu enables you to customize the new boot environment by redirectingfiles onto new mount points.

■ Any critical file systems that exist in the current boot environment and are not specified in a-m option are merged into the next highest-level file system created.

■ Only the file systems that are specified by the -m option are created on the new bootenvironment. If your current boot environment contains multiple file systems, and youwant to have the same number of file systems in the new boot environment created, youmust specify one -m option for each file system to be created. For example, if you have filesystems for root (/), /opt, and /var, you would use one -m option for each file system on thenew boot environment.

■ Do not duplicate a mount point. For example, you cannot have two root (/) file systems.

Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.

Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

To create the new boot environment, type:# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] -c BE_name \

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m ...] -n BE_name

-A 'BE_description'(Optional) Enables the creation of a boot environment description that is associated with theboot environment name (BE_name). The description can be any length and can contain anycharacters.

-c BE_nameAssigns the name BE_name to the active boot environment. This option is not required andis only used when the first boot environment is created. If you run lucreate for the first timeand you omit the -c option, the software creates a default name for you.

The default name is chosen according to the following criteria:■ If the physical boot device can be determined, then the base name of the physical boot

device is used to name the current boot environment.

For example, if the physical boot device is /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0, then the current bootenvironment is given the name c0t0d0s0.

■ If the physical boot device cannot be determined, then names from the uname commandwith the -s and -r options are combined to produce the name.

For example, if the uname -s returns the OS name of SunOS and the uname -r returns therelease name of 5.9, then the name SunOS5.9 is given to the current boot environment.

1

2




■ If both of the above cannot determine the name, then the name current is used to namethe current boot environment.

Note – If you use the -c option after the first boot environment creation, the option is ignoredor an error message is displayed.

■ If the name specified is the same as the current boot environment name, the option isignored.

■ If the name specified is different than the current boot environment name, then an errormessage is displayed and the creation fails. The following example shows a bootenvironment name that causes an error message.

# lucurr

c0t0d0s0

# lucreate -c /dev/dsk/c1t1d1s1 -n newbe -m /:/dev/dsk/c1t1d1s1:ufs

ERROR: current boot environment name is c0t0d0s0: cannot change

name using <-c c1t1d1s1>

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m ...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment in the vfstab. The filesystems that are specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spreadacross multiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of filesystems that are needed.■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:

■ The name of a disk device, of the form /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz■ The name of a Solaris Volume Manager volume, of the form /dev/md/dsk/dnum■ The name of a Veritas Volume Manager volume, of the form

/dev/md/vxfs/dsk/dnum■ The keyword merged, indicating that the file system at the specified mount point is to

be merged with its parent■ fs_options field can be one of the following:

■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.■ vxfs, which indicates a Veritas file system.■ swap, which indicates a swap volume. The swap mount point must be a – (hyphen).■ For file systems that are logical devices (mirrors), several keywords specify actions to

be applied to the file systems. These keywords can create a logical device, change theconfiguration of a logical device, or delete a logical device. For a description of thesekeywords, see “To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)” onpage 79.



-n BE_nameThe name of the boot environment to be created. BE_name must be unique on the system.

When creation of the new boot environment is complete, it can be upgraded and can beactivated (made bootable). See Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks).”

Creating a Boot Environment

In this example, the active boot environment is named first_disk. The mount points for the filesystems are noted by using the -m option. Two file systems are created, root (/) and /usr. Thenew boot environment is named second_disk. A description, mydescription, is associated withthe name second_disk. Swap, in the new boot environment second_disk, is automaticallyshared from the source, first_disk.

# lucreate -A ’mydescription’ -c first_disk -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0:ufs \

-m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s3:ufs -n second_disk

▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Merge File Systems

Note – You can use the lucreate command with the -m option to specify which file systems andthe number of file systems to be created in the new boot environment. You must specify theexact number of file systems you want to create by repeating this option. For example, a singleuse of the -m option specifies where to put all the file systems. You merge all the file systemsfrom the original boot environment into one file system. If you specify the -m option twice, youcreate two file systems.


Type:# lucreate -A ’BE_description’ \

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options \

-m [...] -m mountpoint:merged:fs_options -n BE_name

-A BE_description(Optional) Enables the creation of a boot environment description that is associated with theboot environment name (BE_name). The description can be any length and can contain anycharacters.

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment. The file systems thatare specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spread acrossmultiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of file systemsthat are needed.

Example 4–1

1

2




■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:

■ The name of a disk device, of the form /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz■ The name of a Solaris Volume Manager metadevice, of the form /dev/md/dsk/dnum■ The name of a Veritas Volume Manager volume, of the form

/dev/vx/dsk/volume_name■ The keyword merged, indicating that the file system at the specified mount point is to





When creation of the new boot environment is complete, it can be upgraded and activated(made bootable). See Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks).”

Creating a Boot Environment and Merging File Systems

In this example, the file systems on the current boot environment are root (/), /usr, and /opt.The /opt file system is combined with its parent file system /usr. The new boot environment isnamed second_disk. A description, mydescription, is associated with the name second_disk.

# lucreate -A ’mydescription’ -c first_disk \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0:ufs -m /usr:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s1:ufs \

-m /usr/opt:merged:ufs -n second_disk

Example 4–2



▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Split File Systems

Note – When creating file systems for a boot environment, the rules are identical to the rules forcreating file systems for the Solaris OS. Solaris Live Upgrade cannot prevent you from makinginvalid configurations on critical file systems. For example, you could enter an lucreate

command that would create separate file systems for root (/) and /kernel, which is an aninvalid division of the root (/) file system.

When splitting a directory into multiple mount points, hard links are not maintained across filesystems. For example, if /usr/stuff1/file is hard linked to /usr/stuff2/file, and/usr/stuff1 and /usr/stuff2 are split into separate file systems, the link between the files nolonger exists. lucreate issues a warning message and a symbolic link is created to replace thelost hard link.


Type:# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] \


-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options -n new_BE

-A 'BE_description'(Optional) Enables the creation of a boot environment description that is associated with theboot environment name (BE_name). The description can be any length and contain anycharacters.

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment. The file systems thatare specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spread acrossmultiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of file systemsthat are needed.■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:




1

2







Creating a Boot Environment and Splitting File SystemsIn this example, the preceding command splits the root (/) file system over multiple disk slicesin the new boot environment. Assume a source boot environment that has /usr, /var, and /opt

on root (/): /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0 /.

On the new boot environment, separate /usr, /var, and /opt, mounting these file systems ontheir own slices, as follows:

/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0 /

/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1 /var

/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s7 /usr

/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s5 /opt

A description, mydescription, is associated with the boot environment name second_disk.



-m /var:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:ufs -m /opt:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s5:ufs \

-n second_disk


▼ To Create a Boot Environment and ReconfiguringSwapSwap slices are shared between boot environments by default. By not specifying swap with the-m option, your current and new boot environment share the same swap slices. If you want toreconfigure the new boot environment's swap, use the -m option to add or remove swap slices inthe new boot environment.

Example 4–3



Note – The swap slice cannot be in use by any boot environment except the current bootenvironment or if the -s option is used, the source boot environment. The boot environmentcreation fails if the swap slice is being used by any other boot environment, whether it is a swap,UFS, or any other file system.

You can create a boot environment with the existing swap slices and then edit the vfstab fileafter the creation.





-m -:device:swap -n BE_name






■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.■ vxfs, which indicates a Veritas file system.■ swap, which indicates a swap volume. The swap mount point must be a – (hyphen).

1

2




■ For file systems that are logical devices (mirrors), several keywords specify actions tobe applied to the file systems. These keywords can create a logical device, change theconfiguration of a logical device, or delete a logical device. For a description of thesekeywords, see “To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)” onpage 79.

-n BE_nameThe name of the boot environment to be created. BE_name must be unique.

The new boot environment is created with swap moved to a different slice or device.


Creating a Boot Environment and Reconfiguring Swap

In this example, the current boot environment contains root (/) on /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0 andswap is on /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1. The new boot environment copies root (/) to/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0 and uses both /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1 and /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s1 as swapslices. A description, mydescription, is associated with the boot environment namesecond_disk.


-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0:ufs -m -:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1:swap \

-m -:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s1:swap -n second_disk

These swap assignments are effective only after booting from second_disk. If you have a longlist of swap slices, use the -M option. See “To Create a Boot Environment and Reconfigure Swapby Using a List” on page 72.

▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Reconfigure Swapby Using a ListIf you have a long list of swap slices, create a swap list. lucreate uses this list for the swap slicesin the new boot environment.

Note – The swap slice cannot be in use by any boot environment except the current bootenvironment or if the -s option is used, the source boot environment. The boot environmentcreation fails if the swap slice is being used by any other boot environment, whether the swapslice contains a swap, UFS, or any other file system.

Example 4–4



Create a list of swap slices to be used in the new boot environment. The location and name ofthis file is user defined. In this example, the content of the /etc/lu/swapslices file is a list ofdevices and slices:-:/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2:swap

-:/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s2:swap








-M slice_list -n BE_name








1

2



-M slice_listList of -m options, which are collected in the file slice_list. Specify these arguments in theformat that is specified for -m. Comment lines, which begin with a hash mark (#), areignored. The -M option is useful when you have a long list of file systems for a bootenvironment. Note that you can combine -m and -M options. For example, you can storeswap slices in slice_list and specify root (/) and /usr slices with -m.

The -m and -M options support the listing of multiple slices for a particular mount point. Inprocessing these slices, lucreate skips any unavailable slices and selects the first availableslice.



Create a Boot Environment and Reconfiguring Swap By Using a List

In this example, swap in the new boot environment is the list of slices that are noted in the/etc/lu/swapslices file. A description, mydescription, is associated with the namesecond_disk.



-M /etc/lu/swapslices -n second_disk

▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Copy a ShareableFile SystemIf you want a shareable file system to be copied to the new boot environment, specify the mountpoint to be copied with the -m option. Otherwise, shareable file systems are shared by default,and maintain the same mount point in the vfstab file. Any updating that is applied to theshareable file system is available to both boot environments.


Create the boot environment.# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] \


-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options -n BE_name

Example 4–5

1

2













Creating a Boot Environment and Copying a Shareable File System

In this example, the current boot environment contains two file systems, root (/) and /home. Inthe new boot environment, the root (/) file system is split into two file systems, root (/) and/usr. The /home file system is copied to the new boot environment. A description,mydescription, is associated with the boot environment name second_disk.

Example 4–6





-m /home:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s4:ufs -n second_disk

▼ To Create a Boot Environment From a Different SourceThe lucreate command creates a boot environment that is based on the file systems in theactive boot environment. If you want to create a boot environment based on a bootenvironment other than the active boot environment, use lucreate with the -s option.

Note – If you activate the new boot environment and need to fall back, you boot back to the bootenvironment that was last active, not the source boot environment.


Create the boot environment.# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] -s source_BE_name-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options -n BE_name


-s source_BE_nameSpecifies the source boot environment for the new boot environment. The source would notbe the active boot environment.




be merged with its parent

1

2




■ fs_options field can be one of the following:■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.■ vxfs, which indicates a Veritas file system.■ swap, which indicates a swap volume. The swap mount point must be a – (hyphen).■ For file systems that are logical devices (mirrors), several keywords specify actions to




Creating a Boot Environment From a Different Source

In this example, a boot environment is created that is based on the root (/) file system in thesource boot environment named third_disk. Third_disk is not the active boot environment.A description, mydescription, is associated with the new boot environment namedsecond_disk.

# lucreate -A ’mydescription’ -s third_disk \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0:ufs -n second_disk

▼ To Create an Empty Boot Environment for a SolarisFlash ArchiveThe lucreate command creates a boot environment that is based on the file systems in theactive boot environment. When using the lucreate command with the -s - option, lucreatequickly creates an empty boot environment. The slices are reserved for the file systems that arespecified, but no file systems are copied. The boot environment is named, but not actuallycreated until installed with a Solaris Flash archive. When the empty boot environment isinstalled with an archive, file systems are installed on the reserved slices.


Create the empty boot environment.# lucreate -A ’BE_name’ -s - \

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options -n BE_name

Example 4–7

1

2





-s -Specifies that an empty boot environment be created.








Creating an Empty Boot Environment for a Solaris Flash Archive

In this example, a boot environment is created but contains no file systems. A description,mydescription, is associated with the new boot environment that is named second_disk.

# lucreate -A ’mydescription’ -s - \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs -n second_disk

Example 4–8



When creation of the empty boot environment is complete, a flash archive can be installed andcan be activated (made bootable). See Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade(Tasks).”

For an example of creating and populating an empty boot environment, see “Example ofCreating an Empty Boot Environment and Installing a Solaris Flash Archive” on page 168.

The following image shows the creation of an empty boot environment.

▼ To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volumes(Mirrors)When you create a boot environment, Solaris Live Upgrade uses Solaris Volume Managertechnology to create RAID-1 volumes. When creating a boot environment, you can use SolarisLive Upgrade to manage the following tasks.

■ Remove a single-slice concatenation (submirror) from a RAID-1 volume (mirror). Thecontents can be saved to become the content of the new boot environment if necessary.Because the contents are not copied, the new boot environment can be quickly created.

/swap

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

root (/)

Original System2 Physical Disks

/swap

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

root (/) second_disk

Empty BootEnvironment Creation

Command: # lucreate -s - \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \ -n second_disk

Assignsname andthere is nocopy of file

systems



After the submirror is detached from a mirror, it is no longer part of the original mirror.Reads and writes to the submirror are no longer performed through the mirror.

■ Create a boot environment that contains a mirror.■ Attach a single-slice concatenation to the newly created mirror.

To use the mirroring capabilities of Solaris Live Upgrade, you must create a state database and astate database replica. A state database stores information about disk about the state of yourSolaris Volume Manager configuration.

■ For information about creating a state database, see Chapter 6, “State Database (Overview),”in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

■ For an overview of Solaris Volume Manager and the tasks that Solaris Live Upgrade canprovide, see “Creating a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volume File Systems” on page 27.

■ For in-depth information about complex Solaris Volume Manager configurations that arenot allowed when using Solaris Live Upgrade, see Chapter 2, “Storage ManagementConcepts,” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.


To create the new boot environment, type:# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] \

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m...] \

-n BE_name

-A 'BE_description'(Optional) Enables the creation of a boot environment description that is associated with theboot environment name BE_name. The description can be any length and can contain anycharacters.

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment in the vfstab. The filesystems that are specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spreadacross multiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of filesystems that are needed.■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:


/dev/md/vxfs/dsk/dnum

Before You Begin

1

2








■ The keyword merged, indicating that the file system at the specified mount point is tobe merged with its parent

■ fs_options field can be one of the following types of file systems and keywords:■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.■ vxfs, which indicates a Veritas file system.■ swap, which indicates a swap volume. The swap mount point must be a – (hyphen).■ For file systems that are logical devices (mirrors), several keywords specify actions to

be applied to the file systems. These keywords can create a logical device, change theconfiguration of a logical device, or delete a logical device.■ mirror creates a RAID–1 volume or mirror on the specified device. In subsequent

-m options, you must specify attach to attach at least one concatenation to thenew mirror. The specified device must be correctly named. For example, a logicaldevice name of /dev/md/dsk/d10 can serve as a mirror name. For moreinformation about naming devices, see “Overview of Solaris Volume ManagerComponents” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

■ detach removes a concatenation from a volume that is associated with a specifiedmount point. The volume does not need to be specified.

■ attach attaches a concatenation to the mirror that is associated with a specifiedmount point. The physical disk slice that is specified is made into a single deviceconcatenation for attaching to the mirror. To specify a concatenation to attach toa disk, you append a comma and the name of that concatenation to the devicename. If you omit the comma and the concatenation name, lucreate selects a freevolume for the concatenation.

lucreate allows you to create only concatenations that contain a single physicalslice. This command allows you to attach up to three concatenations to a mirror.

■ preserve saves the existing file system and its content. This keyword enables youto bypass the copying process that copies the content of the source bootenvironment. Saving the content enables a quick creation of the new bootenvironment. For a particular mount point, you can use preserve with only onephysical device. When you use preserve, lucreate checks that the device'scontent is suitable for a specified file system. This check is limited and cannotguarantee suitability.

The preserve keyword can be used with both a physical slice and a SolarisVolume Manager volume.■ If you use the preserve keyword when the UFS file system is on a physical

slice, the content of the UFS file system is saved on the slice. In the followingexample of the -m option, the preserve keyword saves the content of thephysical device c0t0d0s0 as the file system for the mount point for the root (/)file system.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=basics-42385

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=basics-42385

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0:preserve,ufs

■ If you use the preserve keyword when the UFS file system is on a volume, thecontents of the UFS file system are saved on the volume.

In the following example of the -m option, the preserve keyword saves thecontents of the RAID-1 volume (mirror) d10 as the file system for the mountpoint for the root (/) file system.

-m /:/dev/md/dsk/d10:preserve,ufs

In the following example of the -m option, a RAID-1 volume (mirror) d10 isconfigured as the file system for the mount point for the root (/) file system.The single-slice concatenation d20 is detached from its current mirror. d20 isattached to mirror d10. The root (/) file system is preserved on submirror d20.

-m /:/dev/md/dsk/d10:mirror,ufs -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d20:detach,attach,preserve


When the creation of the new boot environment is complete, it can be upgraded and can beactivated (made bootable). See Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks).”

Creating a Boot Environment With a Mirror and Specifying Devices

In this example, the mount points for the file systems are specified by using the -m option.

■ A description, mydescription, is associated with the name another_disk.■ lucreate configures a UFS file system for the mount point root (/). A mirror, d10, is

created. This mirror is the receptacle for the current boot environment's root (/) file systemthat is copied to the mirror d10. All data on the mirror d10 is overwritten.

■ Two slices, c0t0d0s0 and c0t1d0s0, are submirrors, d1 and d2. These two submirrors areadded to mirror d10.

■ The new boot environment is named another_disk.

# lucreate -A ’mydescription’ \

-m /:/dev/md/dsk/d10:ufs,mirror \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d1:attach \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1c0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d2:attach -n another_disk

Creating a Boot Environment With a Mirror and Not Specifying a Submirror Name




Example 4–9

Example 4–10



■ Two slices, c0t0d0s0 and c0t1d0s0, are specified to be used as submirrors. The submirrorsare not specified, but the lucreate command chooses names from a list of available volumenames. These two submirrors are attached to mirror d10.




-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0:attach \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:attach -n another_disk


Creating a Boot Environment and Detaching a Submirror



created.■ Slice c0t0d0s0 is removed from its current mirror. The slice is specified to be submirror d1

and is added to mirror d10. The contents of the submirror, the root (/) file system, are savedand no copy occurs. Slice c0t1d0s0 is submirror d2 and is added to mirror d10.




-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d1:detach,attach,preserve \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0,/dev/md/dsk/d2:attach -n another_disk


Creating a Boot Environment, Detaching a Submirror, and Saving Its Contents



created.■ Slice c0t0d0s0 is removed from its current mirror and added to the mirror d20. The name

of the submirror is not specified. The contents of the submirror, the root (/) file system, aresaved and no copy occurs.


Example 4–11

Example 4–12





-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0:detach,attach,preserve \

-n another_disk

When the creation of the new boot environment is complete, the boot environment can beupgraded and can be activated (made bootable). See Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris LiveUpgrade (Tasks).”

Creating a Boot Environment With Two Mirrors




■ Two slices, c0t0d0s0 and c0t1d0s0, are submirrors d1 and d2. These two submirrors areadded to mirror d10.

■ lucreate configures UFS file system for the mount point /opt. A mirror, d11, is created.This mirror is the receptacle for the current boot environment's /opt file system that iscopied to the mirror d11. All data on the mirror d11 is overwritten.

■ Two slices, c2t0d0s1 and c3t1d0s1, are submirrors d3 and d4. These two submirrors areadded to mirror d11.






-m /opt:/dev/md/dsk/d11:ufs,mirror \

-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c2t0d0s1,/dev/md/dsk/d3:attach \

-m /opt:/dev/dsk/c3t1d0s1,/dev/md/dsk/d4:attach -n another_disk


▼ To Create a Boot Environment and Customize theContentThe content of the file system on the new boot environment can be modified by using thefollowing options. Directories and files are not copied to the new boot environment.

Example 4–13




To create the new boot environment, type:# lucreate -m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m ...] \

[-x exclude_dir] [-y include] \

[-Y include_list_file] \

[-f exclude_list_file]\[-z filter_list] [-I] -n BE_name

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options [-m ...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment in the vfstab. The filesystems that are specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spreadacross multiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of filesystems that are needed.■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:


/dev/md/vxfs/dsk/dnum■ The keyword merged, indicating that the file system at the specified mount point is to




-x exclude_dirExcludes files and directories by not copying them to the new boot environment. You canuse multiple instances of this option to exclude more than one file or directory.

exclude_dir is the name of the directory or file.

-y include_dirCopies directories and files that are listed to the new boot environment. This option is usedwhen you have excluded a directory, but want to restore individual subdirectories or files.

1

2




include_dir is the name of the subdirectory or file to be included.

-Y list_filenameCopies directories and files from a list to the new boot environment. This option is usedwhen you have excluded a directory, but want to restore individual subdirectories or files.■ list_filename is the full path to a file that contains a list.■ The list_filename file must contain one file per line.■ If a line item is a directory, all subdirectories and files beneath that directory are included.

If a line item is a file, only that file is included.

-f list_filenameUses a list to exclude directories and files by not copying them to the new boot environment.■ list_filename is the full path to a file that contains a list.■ The list_filename file must contain one file per line.

-z list_filenameUses a list to copy directories and files to the new boot environment. Each file or directory inthe list is noted with a plus “+” or minus “-”. A plus indicates an included file or directoryand the minus indicates an excluded file or directory.■ list_filename is the full path to a file that contains a list.■ The list_filename file must contain one file per line. A space must follow the plus or

minus before the file name.■ If a line item is a directory and is indicated with a + (plus), all subdirectories and files

beneath that directory are included. If a line item is a file and is indicated with a + (plus),only that file is included.

-I

Overrides the integrity check of system files. Use this option with caution.

To prevent you from removing important system files from a boot environment, lucreateruns an integrity check. This check examines all files that are registered in the systempackage database and stops the boot environment creation if any files are excluded. Use ofthis option overrides this integrity check. This option creates the boot environment morequickly, but might not detect problems.



Creating a Boot Environment and Excluding Files

In this example, the new boot environment is named second_disk. The source bootenvironment contains one file system, root (/). In the new boot environment, the /var file

Example 4–14



system is split from the root (/) file system and put on another slice. The lucreate commandconfigures a UFS file system for the mount points root (/) and /var. Also, two /var mail files,root and staff are not copied to the new boot environment. Swap is automatically sharedbetween the source and the new boot environment.

# lucreate -n second_disk \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs -m /var/mail:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0:ufs \

-x /var/mail/root -x /var/mail/staff

Creating a Boot Environment and Excluding and Including Files

In this example, the new boot environment is named second_disk. The source bootenvironment contains one file system for the OS, root (/). The source also contains a file systemthat is named /mystuff. lucreate configures a UFS file system for the mount points root (/)and /mystuff. Only two directories in /mystuff are copied to the new boot environment:/latest and /backup. Swap is automatically shared between the source and the new bootenvironment.

# lucreate -n second_disk \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c01t0d0s0:ufs -m /mystuff:/dev/dsk/c1t1d0s0:ufs \

-x /mystuff -y /mystuff/latest -y /mystuff/backup

Example 4–15



88

Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks)

This chapter explains how to use Solaris Live Upgrade to upgrade and activate an inactive bootenvironment.

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. The usage is the samefor the luupgrade and luactivate commands for a ZFS boot environment. For procedures formigrating a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFS root pool, seeChapter 13, “Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools.”


■ “Task Map: Upgrading a Boot Environment” on page 89■ “Upgrading a Boot Environment” on page 90■ “Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a Boot Environment” on page 105■ “Activating a Boot Environment” on page 110

Task Map: Upgrading a Boot EnvironmentTABLE 5–1 Task Map: Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade


Either upgrade a boot environmentor install a Solaris Flash archive.

■ Upgrade the inactive bootenvironment with an OSimage.

■ Install a Solaris Flash archiveon an inactive bootenvironment.

■ “Upgrading a BootEnvironment” on page 90

■ “Installing Solaris FlashArchives on a BootEnvironment” on page 105

5C H A P T E R 5

89

TABLE 5–1 Task Map: Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Continued)Task Description For Instructions

Activate an inactive bootenvironment.

Makes changes effective andswitches the inactive bootenvironment to active .

“Activating a Boot Environment”on page 110

(optional) Switch back if a failureoccurs when activating.

Reactivates to the original bootenvironment if a failure occurs.

Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery:Falling Back to the Original BootEnvironment (Tasks)”

Upgrading a Boot EnvironmentUse the luupgrade command to upgrade a boot environment. This section provides theprocedure for upgrading an inactive boot environment from files that are located on thefollowing media:

■ NFS server■ Local file■ Local tape■ Local device, including DVD or CD

Guidelines for UpgradingWhen you upgrade a boot environment with the latest OS, you do not affect the active bootenvironment. The new files merge with the inactive boot environment critical file systems, butshareable file systems are not changed.

You can upgrade when RAID-1 volumes are installed, or if non-global zones are installed, oryou can install a Solaris Flash:

■ You can upgrade an inactive boot environment that contains any combination of physicaldisk slices, Solaris Volume Manager volumes, or Veritas Volume Manager volumes. Theslice that is chosen for the root (/) file system must be a single-slice concatenation that isincluded in a RAID–1 volume (mirror). For procedures about creating a boot environmentwith mirrored file systems, see “To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1 Volumes(Mirrors)” on page 79.

Note – If VxVM volumes are configured on your current system, the lucreate commandcan create a new boot environment. When the data is copied to the new boot environment,the Veritas file system configuration is lost and a UFS file system is created on the new bootenvironment.



■ You can upgrade a system that has non-global zones installed with any installation program.For procedures about upgrading with non-global zones, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading theSolaris OS on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed.”

■ Rather than upgrading, if you have created a Solaris Flash archive, you could install thearchive on an inactive boot environment. The new files overwrite critical file systems of theinactive boot environment, but shareable file systems are not changed. See “Installing SolarisFlash Archives on a Boot Environment” on page 105.

Upgrading a System With Packages or PatchesYou can use Solaris Live Upgrade to add patches and packages to a system. Solaris Live Upgradecreates a copy of the currently running system. This new boot environment can be upgraded oryou can add packages or patches. When you use Solaris Live Upgrade, the only downtime thesystem incurs is that of a reboot. You can add patches and packages to a new boot environmentwith the luupgrade command.

Caution – When adding and removing packages or patches, Solaris Live Upgrade requirespackages or patches that comply with the SVR4 advanced packaging guidelines. While Sunpackages conform to these guidelines, Sun cannot guarantee the conformance of packages fromthird-party vendors. If a package violates these guidelines, the package can cause thepackage-addition software to fail or alter the active boot environment during an upgrade.


TABLE 5–2 Upgrading a Boot Environment With Packages and Patches

Type of Installation Description For More Information

Adding patches to a bootenvironment.

Create a new boot environment anduse the luupgrade command with the-t option.

“To Add Patches to a NetworkInstallation Image on a BootEnvironment” on page 96

Adding packages to a bootenvironment.

Use the luupgrade command with the-p option.

“To Add Packages to a NetworkInstallation Image on a BootEnvironment” on page 94

▼ To Upgrade a Network Installation Image on a BootEnvironmentTo upgrade by using this procedure, you must use a DVD or a network installation image. If theinstallation requires more than one CD, you must use the procedure “To Upgrade a NetworkInstallation Image From Multiple CDs” on page 93.


Chapter 5 • Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks) 91

Note – Starting with the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release, only a DVD is provided. SolarisSoftware CDs are no longer provided.

Install the Solaris Live Upgrade SUNWlucfg, SUNWlur, and SUNWluupackages on your system.These packages must be from the release you are upgrading to. For step-by-step procedures,see “To Install Solaris Live Upgrade With the pkgaddCommand”on page 60.



Indicate the boot environment to upgrade and the path to the installation software by typing:# luupgrade -u -n BE_name -s os_image_path

-u Upgrades a network installation image on a boot environment

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be upgraded

-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains a networkinstallation image

Upgrading a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment From DVD Media

In this example, the second_disk boot environment is upgraded by using DVD media. Thepkgadd command adds the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgradingto.

# pkgadd -d /server/packages SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

# luupgrade -u -n second_disk -s /cdrom/cdrom0

Upgrading a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment From a NetworkInstallation Image

In this example, the second_disk boot environment is upgraded. The pkgadd command addsthe Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgrading to.


# luupgrade -u -n second_disk \

-s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/OS_image

1

2

3

Example 5–1

Example 5–2




▼ To Upgrade a Network Installation Image FromMultiple CDs

Note – Starting with the Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 release, only a DVD is provided. SolarisSoftware CDs are no longer provided.

Because the network installation image resides on more than one CD, you must use thisupgrade procedure. Use the luupgrade command with the -i option to install any additionalCDs.



Indicate the boot environment to upgrade and the path to the installation software by typing:# luupgrade -u -n BE_name -s os_image_path

-u Upgrades a network installation image on a boot environment


-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains a networkinstallation image

When the installer is finished with the contents of the first CD, insert the second CD.

This step is identical to the previous step, but the -uoption is replaced by the -ioption. Also,choose to run the installer on the second CD with menus or with text.

■ This command runs the installer on the second CD with menus.

# luupgrade -i -n BE_name -s os_image_path■ This command runs the installer on the second CD with text and requires no user

interaction.

# luupgrade -i -n BE_name -s os_image_path -O ’-nodisplay -noconsole’

-i Installs additional CDs. The software looks for an installationprogram on the specified medium and runs that program. Theinstaller program is specified with -s.

1

2

3

4

5




-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to beupgraded.

-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains annetwork installation image.

-O '-nodisplay -noconsole' (Optional) Runs the installer on the second CD in text modeand requires no user interaction.

Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for each CD that you want to install.The boot environment is ready to be activated. See “Activating a Boot Environment” onpage 110.

SPARC: Upgrading a Network Installation Image From Multiple CDs

In this example, the second_disk boot environment is upgraded and the installation image ison two CDs: the Solaris Software - 1 and the Solaris Software - 2 CDs. The -u option determinesif sufficient space for all the packages is on the CD set. The -O option with the -nodisplay and-noconsole options prevents the character user interface from displaying after the reading ofthe second CD. If you use these options, you are not prompted to type information.

Note: If you do not use the -O option with the -nodisplay and -noconsole options, thecharacter user interface (CUI) is displayed. Sun no longer recommends using the CUI to doSolaris Live Upgrade tasks.

Install the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgrading to.


Insert the Solaris Software - 1 CD and type:

# luupgrade -u -n second_disk -s /cdrom/cdrom0/

Insert the Solaris Software - 2 CD and type the following.

# luupgrade -i -n second_disk -s /cdrom/cdrom0 -O ’-nodisplay \

-noconsole’

Repeat this step for each CD that you need.

Repeat the previous step for each CD that you want to install.

▼ To Add Packages to a Network Installation Image on aBoot EnvironmentIn the following procedure, packages are removed from and added to a new boot environment.

6

Example 5–3



Caution – When you are upgrading. adding and removing packages or patches, Solaris LiveUpgrade requires packages or patches that comply with the SVR4 advanced packagingguidelines. While Sun packages conform to these guidelines, Sun cannot guarantee theconformance of packages from third-party vendors. If a package violates these guidelines, thepackage can cause the package-addition software to fail or can alter the active bootenvironment.



To remove a package or set of packages from a new boot environment, type:# luupgrade -P -n second_disk package-name

-P Indicates to remove the named package or packages from the bootenvironment

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment where the package is to beremoved

package-name Specifies the names of the packages to be removed. Separate multiplepackage names with spaces.

To add a package or a set of packages to the new boot environment, type:# luupgrade -p -n second_disk -s /path-to-packages package-name

-p Indicates to add packages to the boot environment.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment where the package is to beadded.

-s path-to-packages Specifies the path to a directory that contains the package or packagesthat are to be added.

package-name Specifies the names of the package or packages to be added. Separatemultiple package names with a space.

Adding packages to a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment

In this example, packages are removed then added to the second_disk boot environment.

1

2

3

Example 5–4




# luupgrade -P -n second_disk SUNWabc SUNWdef SUNWghi

# luupgrade -p -n second_disk -s /net/installmachine/export/packages \

SUNWijk SUNWlmn SUNWpkr

▼ To Add Patches to a Network Installation Image on aBoot EnvironmentIn the following procedure, patches are removed from and added to a new boot environment.

Caution – When you are adding and removing packages or patches, Solaris Live Upgraderequires packages or patches that comply with the SVR4 advanced packaging guidelines. WhileSun packages conform to these guidelines, Sun cannot guarantee the conformance of packagesfrom third-party vendors. If a package violates these guidelines, the package can cause thepackage-addition software to fail or can alter the active boot environment.

Caution – You cannot use Solaris Live Upgrade to patch a Solaris 10 inactive boot environmentwhen the active boot environment is running the Solaris 8 or 9 OS. Solaris Live Upgrade willinvoke the patch utilities on the active boot partition to patch the inactive boot partition. TheSolaris 8 and Solaris 9 patch utilities are unaware of Solaris Zone, Service Management Facility(SMF), and other enhancements in the Solaris 10 OS. Therefore the patch utilities fail tocorrectly patch an inactive Solaris 10 boot environment. Therefore, if you are using Solaris LiveUpgrade to upgrade a system from the Solaris 8 or Solaris 9 OS to the Solaris 10 OS, you mustfirst activate the Solaris 10 boot environment before patching. After the Solaris 10 bootenvironment is activated, you can either patch the active boot environment directly or set upanother inactive boot environment and patch that one by using Solaris Live Upgrade. For anexample of upgrading and patching from the Solaris 8 to the Solaris 10 release, see Restrictionsfor Using Solaris Live Upgrade.


To remove a patch or set of patches from a new boot environment, type:# luupgrade -T -n second_disk patch_name

-T Indicates to remove the named patch or patches from the boot environment.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment where the patch or patches are tobe removed.

1

2



http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/features/articles/live_upgrade_patch.jsp

http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/features/articles/live_upgrade_patch.jsp


patch-name Specifies the names of the patches to be removed. Separate multiple patchnames with spaces.

To add a patch or a set of patches to the new boot environment, type the following command.# luupgrade -t -n second_disk -s /path-to-patches patch-name

-t Indicates to add patches to the boot environment.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment where the patch is to beadded.

-s path-to-patches Specifies the path to the directory that contains the patches that are to beadded.

patch-name Specifies the names of the patch or patches that are to be added. Separatemultiple patch names with a space.

Adding Patches to a Network Installation Image on a Boot Environment

In this example, patches are removed then added to the second_disk boot environment .

# luupgrade -T -n second_disk 222222-01

# luupgrade -t -n second_disk -s /net/installmachine/export/packages \

333333-01 4444444-01

▼ To Obtain Information on Packages Installed on a BootEnvironmentThe follow procedure checks the integrity of the packages installed on the new bootenvironment.


To check the integrity of the newly installed packages on the new boot environment, type:# luupgrade -C -n BE_name -O "-v" package-name

-C Indicates to run the pkgchk command on the named packages

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment where the check is to beperformed

-O Passes the options directly to the pkgchk command

3

Example 5–5

1

2




package-name Specifies the names of the packages to be checked. Separate multiple packagenames with spaces. If package names are omitted, the check is done on allpackages in the specified boot environment.

“-v” Specifies to run the command in verbose mode

Checking the Integrity of Packages on a Boot Environment

In this example, the packages SUNWabc, SUNWdef, and SUNWghi are checked to make sure theywere installed properly and are not damaged.

# luupgrade -C -n second_disk SUNWabc SUNWdef SUNWghi

Upgrading by Using a JumpStart ProfileYou can create a JumpStart profile to use with Solaris Live Upgrade. If you are familiar with thecustom JumpStart program, this is the same profile that custom JumpStart uses. The followingprocedures enable you to create a profile, test the profile, and install by using the luupgradecommand with the -j option.

Caution – When you install the Solaris OS with a Solaris Flash archive, the archive and theinstallation media must contain identical OS versions. For example, if the archive is the Solaris10 operating system and you are using DVD media, then you must use Solaris 10 DVD media toinstall the archive. If the OS versions do not match, the installation on the target system fails.Identical operating systems are necessary when you use the following keyword or command:

■ archive_location keyword in a profile■ luupgrade command with -s, -a, -j, and -J options

For more information see the following:

■ “To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98■ “To Test a Profile to Be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 102■ “To Upgrade With a Profile by Using Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 103■ For creating a JumpStart profile, see “Creating a Profile” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10

Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations

▼ To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live UpgradeThis procedure shows you how to create a profile for use with Solaris Live Upgrade. You can usethis profile to upgrade an inactive boot environment by using the luupgrade command with the-j option.

Example 5–6



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=preparecustom-53442


For procedures to use this profile, see the following sections:

■ For an upgrade with a profile, see “To Upgrade With a Profile by Using Solaris LiveUpgrade” on page 103.

■ For a Solaris Flash installation with a profile, see “To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With aProfile” on page 107.

Use a text editor to create a text file.Name the file descriptively. Ensure that the name of the profile reflects how you intend to usethe profile to install the Solaris software on a system. For example, you might name this profileupgrade_Solaris_10.

Add profile keywords and values to the profile.Only the upgrade keywords in the following tables can be used in a Solaris Live Upgrade profile.

The following table lists the keywords you can use with the Install_type keyword values ofupgrade or flash_install.

Keywords for an Initial Archive Creation Description Reference

(Required) Install_type Defines whether to upgrade the existing Solarisenvironment on a system or install a SolarisFlash archive on the system. Use the followingvalues with this keyword:■ upgrade for an upgrade■ flash_install for a Solaris Flash

installation■ flash_update for a Solaris Flash

differential installation

For a description of all the values for thiskeyword, see “install_type Profile Keyword(UFS and ZFS)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart andAdvanced Installations.

(Required for a Solaris Flasharchive) archive_location

Retrieves a Solaris Flash archive from adesignated location.

For a list of values that can be used with thiskeyword, see “archive_location Keyword” inOracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations.

(Optional) cluster (adding ordeleting clusters)

Designates whether a cluster is to be added ordeleted from the software group that is to beinstalled on the system.

For a list of values that can be used with thiskeyword, see “cluster Profile Keyword (AddingSoftware Groups) (UFS and ZFS)” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: CustomJumpStart and Advanced Installations.

(Optional) geo Designates the regional locale or locales thatyou want to install on a system or to add whenupgrading a system.

For a list of values that can be used with thiskeyword, see “geo Profile Keyword (UFS andZFS)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Custom JumpStart and AdvancedInstallations.

1

2


















Keywords for an Initial Archive Creation Description Reference

(Optional) local_customization Before you install a Solaris Flash archive on aclone system, you can create custom scripts topreserve local configurations on the clonesystem. The local_customization keyworddesignates the directory where you have storedthese scripts. The value is the path to the scripton the clone system.

For information about predeployment andpostdeployment scripts, see “CreatingCustomization Scripts” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Solaris FlashArchives (Creation and Installation).

(Optional) locale Designates the locale packages you want toinstall or add when upgrading.

For a list of values that can be used with thiskeyword, see “locale Profile Keyword (UFS andZFS)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Custom JumpStart and AdvancedInstallations.

(Optional) package Designates whether a package is to be added toor deleted from the software group that is to beinstalled on the system.

For a list of values that can be used with thiskeyword, see “package Profile Keyword (UFSand ZFS)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Custom JumpStart and AdvancedInstallations.

The following table lists the keywords you can use with the Install_type keyword valueflash_update.

Keywords for a Differential ArchiveCreation Description Reference

(Required) Install_type Defines the installation to install a Solaris Flash archive onthe system. The value for a differential archive isflash_update.

For a description of all the values for thiskeyword, see “install_type ProfileKeyword (UFS and ZFS)” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Custom JumpStart and AdvancedInstallations.

(Required)archive_location

Retrieves a Solaris Flash archive from a designatedlocation.

For a list of values that can be used withthis keyword, see “archive_locationKeyword” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Custom JumpStartand Advanced Installations.

(Optional)forced_deployment

Forces the installation of a Solaris Flash differentialarchive onto a clone system that is different than thesoftware expects. If you use forced_deployment, all newfiles are deleted to bring the clone system to the expectedstate. If you are not certain that you want files to bedeleted, use the default, which protects new files bystopping the installation.

For more information about thiskeyword, see “forced_deploymentProfile Keyword (Installing Solaris FlashDifferential Archives)” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Custom JumpStart and AdvancedInstallations.
























http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=jumpstartreference-702






Keywords for a Differential ArchiveCreation Description Reference

(Optional)local_customization

Before you install a Solaris Flash archive on a clonesystem, you can create custom scripts to preserve localconfigurations on the clone system. Thelocal_customization keyword designates the directorywhere you have stored these scripts. The value is the pathto the script on the clone system.

For information about predeploymentand postdeployment scripts, see“Creating Customization Scripts” inOracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide:Solaris Flash Archives (Creation andInstallation).

(Optional)no_content_check

When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flashdifferential archive, you can use the no_content_checkkeyword to ignore file-by-file validation. File-by-filevalidation ensures that the clone system is a duplicate ofthe master system. Avoid using this keyword unless youare sure the clone system is a duplicate of the originalmaster system.

For more information about thiskeyword, see “no_content_check ProfileKeyword (Installing Solaris FlashArchives)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Custom JumpStartand Advanced Installations.

(Optional) no_master_check When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flashdifferential archive, you can use the no_master_checkkeyword to ignore a check of files. Clone system files arenot checked. A check would ensure the clone was builtfrom the original master system. Avoid using this keywordunless you are sure the clone system is a duplicate of theoriginal master system.

For more information about thiskeyword, see “no_master_check ProfileKeyword (Installing Solaris FlashArchives)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Custom JumpStartand Advanced Installations.

Save the profile in a directory on the local system.

Ensure that rootowns the profile and that the permissions are set to 644.

Test the profile (optional).For a procedure to test the profile, see “To Test a Profile to Be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” onpage 102.

Creating a Solaris Live Upgrade Profile

In this example, a profile provides the upgrade parameters. This profile is to be used to upgradean inactive boot environment with the Solaris Live Upgrade luupgrade command and the -uand -j options. This profile adds a package and a cluster. A regional locale and additionallocales are also added to the profile. If you add locales to the profile, make sure that you havecreated a boot environment with additional disk space.

# profile keywords profile values

# ---------------- -------------------

install_type upgrade

package SUNWxwman add

cluster SUNWCacc add

geo C_Europe

locale zh_TW

3

4

5

Example 5–7

















locale zh_TW.BIG5

locale zh_TW.UTF-8

locale zh_HK.UTF-8

locale zh_HK.BIG5HK

locale zh

locale zh_CN.GB18030

locale zh_CN.GBK

locale zh_CN.UTF-8

Creating a Solaris Live Upgrade Profile to Install a Differential Archive

The following example of a profile is to be used by Solaris Live Upgrade to install a differentialarchive on a clone system. Only files that are specified by the differential archive are added,deleted, or changed. The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an NFS server. Because theimage was built by the original master system, the clone system is not checked for a valid systemimage. This profile is to be used with the Solaris Live Upgrade luupgrade command and the -uand -j options.


# ---------------- -------------------

install_type flash_update

archive_location nfs installserver:/export/solaris/archive/solarisarchive

no_master_check

To use the luupgrade command to install the differential archive, see “To Install a Solaris FlashArchive With a Profile” on page 107.

▼ To Test a Profile to Be Used by Solaris Live UpgradeAfter you create a profile, use the luupgrade command to test the profile. By looking at theinstallation output that is generated by luupgrade, you can quickly determine if a profile worksas you intended.


Test the profile.# luupgrade -u -n BE_name -D -s os_image_path -j profile_path

-u Upgrades an operating system image on a boot environment.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be upgraded.

-D luupgrade command uses the selected boot environment's diskconfiguration to test the profile options that are passed with the -joption.

Example 5–8

1

2




-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains an operating systemimage. This directory can be on an installation medium, such as aDVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or it can be an NFS or UFS directory.

-j profile_path Path to a profile that is configured for an upgrade. The profile must be ina directory on the local machine.

Testing a Profile by Using Solaris Live Upgrade

In the following example, the profile is named Flash_profile. The profile is successfully testedon the inactive boot environment that is named second_disk.

# luupgrade -u -n u1b08 -D -s /net/installsvr/export/u1/combined.u1wos \

-j /var/tmp/flash_profile

Validating the contents of the media /net/installsvr/export/u1/combined.u1wos.

The media is a standard Solaris media.

The media contains an operating system upgrade image.

The media contains Solaris version 10.

Locating upgrade profile template to use.

Locating the operating system upgrade program.

Checking for existence of previously scheduled Live Upgrade requests.

Creating upgrade profile for BE second_disk.

Determining packages to install or upgrade for BE second_disk.

Simulating the operating system upgrade of the BE second_disk.

The operating system upgrade simulation is complete.

INFORMATION: var/sadm/system/data/upgrade_cleanup contains a log of the

upgrade operation.

INFORMATION: var/sadm/system/data/upgrade_cleanup contains a log of

cleanup operations required.

The Solaris upgrade of the boot environment second_disk is complete.

You can now use the profile to upgrade an inactive boot environment.

▼ To Upgrade With a Profile by Using Solaris Live UpgradeThis procedure provides step-by-step instructions for upgrading an OS by using a profile.

If you want to install a Solaris Flash archive by using a profile, see “To Install a Solaris FlashArchive With a Profile” on page 107.

If you added locales to the profile, make sure that you have created a boot environment withadditional disk space.

Example 5–9



Caution – When you install the Solaris OS with a Solaris Flash archive, the archive and theinstallation media must contain identical OS versions. For example, if the archive is the Solaris10 operating system and you are using DVD media, then you must use Solaris 10 DVD media toinstall the archive. If the OS versions do not match, the installation on the target system fails.Identical operating systems are necessary when you use the following keyword or command:

■ archive_location keyword in a profile■ luupgrade command with -s, -a, -j, and -J options



Create a profile.See “To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98 for a list of upgradekeywords that can be used in a Solaris Live Upgrade profile.

Type:# luupgrade -u -n BE_name -s os_image_path -j profile_path

-u Upgrades an operating system image on a boot environment.


-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains an operating systemimage. This directory can be on an installation medium, such as aDVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or it can be an NFS or UFS directory.

-j profile_path Path to a profile. The profile must be in a directory on the local machine.For information about creating a profile, see “To Create a Profile to beUsed by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98.

Upgrading a Boot Environment by Using a Custom JumpStart Profile

In this example, the second_disk boot environment is upgraded by using a profile. The -joption is used to access the profile. The boot environment is then ready to be activated. Tocreate a profile, see “To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98. Thepkgadd command adds the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgradingto.

1

2

3

4

Example 5–10





# luupgrade -u -n second_disk \

-s /net/installmachine/export/solarisX/OS_image \

-j /var/tmp/profile

The boot environment is ready to be activated. See “Activating a Boot Environment” onpage 110.

Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a Boot EnvironmentThis section provides the procedure for using Solaris Live Upgrade to install Solaris Flasharchives. Installing a Solaris Flash archive overwrites all files on the new boot environmentexcept for shared files. Archives are stored on the following media:

■ HTTP server■ FTP server – Use this path from the command line only■ NFS server■ Local file■ Local tape■ Local device, including DVD or CD

Note the following issues with installing and creating a Solaris Flash archive.

Description Example

Caution – When you install the Solaris OS with a SolarisFlash archive, the archive and the installation mediamust contain identical OS versions. If the OS versionsdo not match, the installation on the target systemfails. Identical operating systems are necessary whenyou use the following keyword or command:■ archive_location keyword in a profile■ luupgrade command with -s, -a, -j, and -J

options

For example, if the archive is the Solaris 10 operatingsystem and you are using DVD media, then you mustuse Solaris 10 DVD media to install the archive.

Caution – A Solaris Flash archive cannot be properlycreated when a non-global zone is installed. TheSolaris Flash feature is not compatible with the SolarisZones feature. If you create a Solaris Flash archive in anon-global zone or create an archive in a global zonethat has non-global zones installed, the resultingarchive does not install properly when the archive isdeployed.

Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a Boot Environment



For examples of the correct syntax for paths that areassociated with archive storage.

See “archive_location Keyword” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStartand Advanced Installations.

To use the Solaris Flash installation feature, you installa master system and create the Solaris Flash archive.

For more information about creating an archive, seeChapter 3, “Creating Solaris Flash Archives (Tasks),”in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: SolarisFlash Archives (Creation and Installation).

▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive on a BootEnvironment




Type:# luupgrade -f -n BE_name -s os_image_path -a archive

-f Indicates to install an operating system from a Solaris Flash archive.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be installed with anarchive.

-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains an operating systemimage. This directory can be on an installation medium, such as aDVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or it can be an NFS or UFS directory. This OSimage provides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootable root (/) filesystem to facilitate the installation of the Solaris Flash archive. Theminiroot is not the image that is installed. The -a option provides theoperating system image.

-a archive Path to the Solaris Flash archive when the archive is available on the localfile system. The operating system image versions that are specified withthe -s option and the -a option must be identical.

1

2

3











In this example, an archive is installed on the second_disk boot environment. The archive islocated on the local system. The -s option provides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootableroot (/) file system to facilitate the installation of the Solaris Flash archive. The miniroot is notthe image that is installed. The -a option provides the operating system image. The operatingsystem versions for the -s and -a options are both Solaris 10 9/10 releases. All files areoverwritten on second_disk except shareable files. The pkgadd command adds the Solaris Liveupgrade packages from the release you are upgrading to.


# luupgrade -f -n second_disk \

-s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/OS_image \

-a /net/server/archive/10


▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a ProfileThis procedure provides the steps to install a Solaris Flash archive or differential archive byusing a profile.

If you added locales to the profile, make sure that you have created a boot environment withadditional disk space.



Create a profile.See “To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98 for a list of keywordsthat can be used in a Solaris Live Upgrade profile.

Type:# luupgrade -f -n BE_name -s os_image_path -j profile_path

-f Indicates to install an operating system from a Solaris Flash archive.


Example 5–11

1

2

3

4




-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains an operating systemimage. This directory can be on an installation medium, such as aDVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or it can be an NFS or UFS directory. This OSimage provides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootable root (/) filesystem to facilitate the installation of the Solaris Flash archive. Theminiroot is not the image that is installed. The -j option provides thepath to the profile that contains the Solaris Flash archive operatingsystem image.

-j profile_path Path to a JumpStart profile that is configured for a flash installation. Theprofile must be in a directory on the local machine. The -s option'soperating system version and the Solaris Flash archive operating systemversion must be identical.


Install a Solaris Flash archive on a Boot Environment With a Profile

In this example, a profile provides the location of the archive to be installed.


# ---------------- -------------------

install_type flash_install

archive_location nfs installserver:/export/solaris/flasharchive/solarisarchive

After creating the profile, you can run the luupgrade command and install the archive. The -soption provides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootable root (/) file system to facilitate theinstallation of the Solaris Flash archive. The miniroot is not the image that is installed. The -joption provides the path to the profile that contains the path to the Solaris Flash archiveoperating system image. The -j option is used to access the profile. The pkgadd command addsthe Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgrading to.




-j /var/tmp/profile

The boot environment is then ready to be activated. See “Activating a Boot Environment” onpage 110.

To create a profile, see “To Create a Profile to be Used by Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 98.

Example 5–12



▼ To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a ProfileKeywordThis procedure enables you to install a Solaris Flash archive and use the archive_locationkeyword at the command line rather than from a profile file. You can quickly retrieve an archivewithout the use of a profile file.



Type:# luupgrade -f -n BE_name -s os_image_path -J ’archive_location path-to-profile'

-f Specifies to upgrade an operating system from a SolarisFlash archive.

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to beupgraded.

-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains anoperating system image. This directory can be on aninstallation medium, such as a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM,or it can be an NFS or UFS directory. This OS imageprovides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootableroot (/) file system to facilitate the installation of theSolaris Flash archive. The miniroot is not the imagethat is installed. The -j option provides the path to theprofile that contains the Solaris Flash archive operatingsystem image.

-J 'archive_location path-to-profile' Specifies the archive_location profile keyword andthe path to the JumpStart profile. The -s option'soperating system version and the Solaris Flash archiveoperating system version must be identical. For thekeyword values, see “archive_location Keyword” inOracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: CustomJumpStart and Advanced Installations.


1

2

3







Installing a Solaris Flash Archive By Using a Profile Keyword

In this example, an archive is installed on the second_disk boot environment. The -s optionprovides a miniroot that boots a minimal, bootable root (/) file system to facilitate theinstallation of the Solaris Flash archive. The miniroot is not the image that is installed. The -joption provides the path to the Solaris Flash archive operating system image. The -J option andthe archive_location keywords are used to retrieve the archive. All files are overwritten onsecond_disk except shareable files. The pkgadd command adds the Solaris Live Upgradepackages from the release you are upgrading to.




-J ’archive_location http://example.com/myflash.flar’

Activating a Boot EnvironmentActivating a boot environment makes it bootable on the next reboot of the system. You can alsoswitch back quickly to the original boot environment if a failure occurs on booting the newlyactive boot environment. See Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the Original BootEnvironment (Tasks).”


Use this procedure to activate a boot environmentwith the luactivate command.

Note – The first time you activate a boot environment,the luactivate command must be used.

“To Activate a Boot Environment” on page 111

Use this procedure to activate a boot environment andforce a synchronization of files.

Note – Files are synchronized with the first activation.If you switch boot environments after the firstactivation, files are not synchronized.

“To Activate a Boot Environment and SynchronizeFiles” on page 112

x86: Use this procedure to activate a bootenvironment with the GRUB menu.

Note – A GRUB menu can facilitate switching fromone boot environment to another. A bootenvironment appears in the GRUB menu after the firstactivation.

“x86: To Activate a Boot Environment With theGRUB Menu” on page 115

Example 5–13



Requirements and Limitations for Activating a BootEnvironmentTo successfully activate a boot environment, that boot environment must meet the followingconditions:


The boot environment must have a status of“complete.”

To check status, see “Displaying the Status of All BootEnvironments” on page 128

If the boot environment is not the current bootenvironment, you cannot have mounted the partitionsof that boot environment by using the luumount ormount commands.

To view man pages, see lumount(1M) or mount(1M)

The boot environment that you want to activatecannot be involved in a comparison operation.

For procedures, see “Comparing Boot Environments”on page 131

If you want to reconfigure swap, make this changeprior to booting the inactive boot environment. Bydefault, all boot environments share the same swapdevices.

To reconfigure swap, see “To Create a BootEnvironment and Reconfiguring Swap” on page 70

x86 only – If you have an x86 based system, you can also activate with the GRUB menu. Note thefollowing exceptions:

■ If a boot environment was created with the Solaris 8, 9, or 10 3/05 release, the bootenvironment must always be activated with the luactivate command. These older bootenvironments do not display on the GRUB menu.

■ The first time you activate a boot environment, you must use the luactivate command.The next time you boot, that boot environment's name is displayed in the GRUB mainmenu. You can thereafter switch to this boot environment by selecting the appropriate entryin the GRUB menu.

See “x86: Activating a Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu” on page 114.

▼ To Activate a Boot EnvironmentThe following procedure switches a new boot environment to become the currently runningboot environment.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lumount-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=mount-1m

x86 only – If you have an x86 based system, you can also activate with the GRUB menu. Note thefollowing exceptions:

■ If a boot environment was created with the Solaris 8, 9, or 10 3/05 release, the bootenvironment must always be activated with the luactivate command. These older bootenvironments do not display on the GRUB menu.

■ The first time you activate a boot environment, you must use the luactivate command.The next time you boot, that boot environment's name is displayed in the GRUB mainmenu. You can thereafter switch to this boot environment by selecting the appropriate entryin the GRUB menu.

See “x86: Activating a Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu” on page 114.



To activate the boot environment, type:# /sbin/luactivate BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be activated

Reboot.# init 6

Caution – Use only the init or shutdown commands to reboot. If you use the reboot, halt, oruadmin commands, the system does not switch boot environments. The last-active bootenvironment is booted again.


In this example, the second_disk boot environment is activated at the next reboot.

# /sbin/luactivate second_disk

# init 6

▼ To Activate a Boot Environment and Synchronize FilesThe first time you boot from a newly created boot environment, Solaris Live Upgrade softwaresynchronizes the new boot environment with the boot environment that was last active.“Synchronize” means that certain critical system files and directories are copied from the

1

2

3

Example 5–14




last-active boot environment to the boot environment being booted. Solaris Live Upgrade doesnot perform this synchronization after the initial boot, unless you force synchronization withthe luactivate command and the -s option.

x86 only – When you switch between boot environments with the GRUB menu, files also are notsynchronized. You must use the following procedure to synchronize files.

For more information about synchronization, see “Synchronizing Files Between BootEnvironments” on page 54.


To activate the boot environment, type:# /sbin/luactivate -s BE_name

-s Forces a synchronization of files between the last-active boot environment andthe new boot environment. The first time that a boot environment is activated,the files between the boot environment are synchronized With subsequentactivations, the files are not synchronized unless you use the -s option.

Caution – Use this option with great care, because you might not be aware of or incontrol of changes that might have occurred in the last-active boot environment.For example, if you were running Solaris 10 9/10 software on your current bootenvironment and booted back to a Solaris 9 release with a forcedsynchronization, files could be changed on the Solaris 9 release. Because files aredependent on the release of the OS, the boot to the Solaris 9 release could failbecause the Solaris 10 9/10 files might not be compatible with the Solaris 9 files.

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be activated.

Reboot.# init 6


In this example, the second_disk boot environment is activated at the next reboot and the filesare synchronized.

1

2

3

Example 5–15




# /sbin/luactivate -s second_disk

# init 6

x86: Activating a Boot Environment With the GRUBMenuA GRUB menu provides an optional method of switching between boot environments. TheGRUB menu is an alternative to activating (booting) with the luactivate command. The tablebelow notes cautions and limitations when using the GRUB menu.

TABLE 5–3 x86: Activating With the GRUB Menu Summary

Task Description For More Information

Caution After you have activated a boot environment, do not change thedisk order in the BIOS. Changing the order might cause theGRUB menu to become invalid. If this problem occurs, changingthe disk order back to the original state fixes the GRUB menu.

Activating a bootenvironment for thefirst time

The first time you activate a boot environment, you must use theluactivate command. The next time you boot, that bootenvironment's name is displayed in the GRUB main menu. Youcan thereafter switch to this boot environment by selecting theappropriate entry in the GRUB menu.

“To Activate a Boot Environment” onpage 111

Synchronizing files The first time you activate a boot environment, files aresynchronized between the current boot environment and thenew boot environment. With subsequent activations, files are notsynchronized. When you switch between boot environmentswith the GRUB menu, files also are not synchronized. You canforce a synchronization when using the luactivate commandwith the -s option.

“To Activate a Boot Environment andSynchronize Files” on page 112

Boot environmentscreated before theSolaris 10 1/06 release

If a boot environment was created with the Solaris 8, 9, or 103/05 release, the boot environment must always be activatedwith the luactivate command. These older boot environmentsdo not display on the GRUB menu.

“To Activate a Boot Environment” onpage 111



TABLE 5–3 x86: Activating With the GRUB Menu Summary (Continued)Task Description For More Information

Editing or customizingthe GRUB menuentries

The menu.lst file contains the information that is displayed inthe GRUB menu. You can revise this file for the followingreasons:■ To add to the GRUB menu entries for operating systems

other than the Solaris OS.

■ To customize booting behavior. For example, you couldchange booting to verbose mode or change the default timethat automatically boots the OS.

Note – If you want to change the GRUB menu, you need to locatethe menu.lst file. For step-by-step instructions, see Chapter 13,“Managing the Oracle Solaris Boot Archives (Tasks),” in SystemAdministration Guide: Basic Administration.

Caution – Do not use the GRUB menu.lst file to modify SolarisLive Upgrade entries. Modifications could cause Solaris LiveUpgrade to fail. Although you can use the menu.lst file tocustomize booting behavior, the preferred method forcustomization is to use the eeprom command. If you use themenu.lst file to customize, the Solaris OS entries might bemodified during a software upgrade. Changes to the file could belost.

■ “GRUB Based Booting (Overview)”in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Planning for Installation andUpgrade

■ “Booting an x86 Based System byUsing GRUB (Task Map)” in SystemAdministration Guide: BasicAdministration

▼ x86: To Activate a Boot Environment With the GRUBMenuYou can switch between two boot environments with the GRUB menu. Note the followinglimitations:

■ The first activation of a boot environment must be done with the luactivate command.After the initial activation, the boot environment is displayed on the GRUB menu. The bootenvironment can then be booted from the GRUB menu.

■ Caution - Switching to a boot environment with the GRUB menu bypassessynchronization. For more information about synchronizing files, see link “Forcing aSynchronization Between Boot Environments” on page 55.

■ If a boot environment was created with the Solaris 8, 9, or 10 3/05 release, the bootenvironment must always be activated with the luactivate command. These older bootenvironments are not displayed on the GRUB menu.






http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=fxivs




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=hbx86boot-68676





Reboot the system.# init 6

The GRUB main menu is displayed. The two operating systems are listed, Solaris andsecond_disk, which is a Solaris Live Upgrade boot environment. The failsafe entries are forrecovery, if for some reason the primary OS does not boot.

GNU GRUB version 0.95 (616K lower / 4127168K upper memory)

+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris |

|Solaris failsafe |

|second_disk |

|second_disk failsafe |

+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press

enter to boot the selected OS, ’e’ to edit the commands before

booting, or ’c’ for a command-line.

To activate a boot environment, use the arrow key to select the desired boot environment andpress Return.The selected boot environment is booted and becomes the active boot environment.

1

2

3




Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the OriginalBoot Environment (Tasks)

This chapter explains how to recover from an activation failure.

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. The usage for theluactivate command for a ZFS boot environment is the same. For procedures for migrating aUFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFS root pool, see Chapter 13,“Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools.”

If a failure is detected after upgrading or if the application is not compatible with an upgradedcomponent, fall back to the original boot environment by using one of the followingprocedures, depending on your platform.

■ For SPARC based systems:■ “SPARC: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation” on page 118■ “SPARC: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation” on page 118■ “SPARC: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or Net

Installation Image” on page 119■ For x86 based systems:

■ “x86: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation With the GRUBMenu” on page 121

■ “x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menu”on page 122

■ “x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menuand the DVD or CD” on page 124

6C H A P T E R 6

117

SPARC: Falling Back to the Original Boot EnvironmentYou can fallback to the original boot environment by using three methods:

■ “SPARC: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation” on page 118■ “SPARC: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation” on page 118■ “SPARC: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or Net

Installation Image” on page 119

▼ SPARC: To Fall Back Despite Successful New BootEnvironment ActivationUse this procedure when you have successfully activated your new boot environment, but areunhappy with the results.


Type:# /sbin/luactivate BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment to be activated

Reboot.# init 6

The previous working boot environment becomes the active boot environment.

▼ SPARC: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot EnvironmentActivation■ If you experience a failure while booting the new boot environment and can boot the

original boot environment in single-user mode, use this procedure to fall back to theoriginal boot environment.

■ If you need to boot from media or a net installation image, see “SPARC: To Fall Back to theOriginal Boot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or Net Installation Image” on page 119.

At the OK prompt, boot the machine to single-user state from the Solaris Operating SystemDVD, Solaris Software - 1 CD, the network, or a local disk.OK boot device_name -s

1

2

3

1

SPARC: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment



device_name Specifies the name of devices from where the system can boot, for example/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0

Type:# /sbin/luactivate BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment to be activated

■ If this command fails to display a prompt, proceed to “SPARC: To Fall Back to the OriginalBoot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or Net Installation Image” on page 119.

■ If the prompt is displayed, continue.

At the prompt, type:Do you want to fallback to activate boot environment <disk name>

(yes or no)? yes

A message displays that the fallback activation is successful.

Reboot.# init 6


▼ SPARC: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environmentby Using a DVD, CD, or Net Installation ImageUse this procedure to boot from a DVD, CD, a net installation image or another disk that can bebooted. You need to mount the root (/) slice from the last-active boot environment. Then runthe luactivate command, which makes the switch. When you reboot, the last-active bootenvironment is up and running again.

At the OK prompt, boot the machine to single-user state from the Solaris Operating SystemDVD, Solaris Software - 1 CD, the network, or a local disk:OK boot cdrom -s

or

OK boot net -s

or

OK boot device_name -s

device_name Specifies the name of the disk and the slice where a copy of the operatingsystem resides, for example /dev/dsk/c0t0d0s0

2

3

4

1

SPARC: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment

Chapter 6 • Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment (Tasks) 119

If necessary, check the integrity of the root (/) file system for the fallback boot environment.# fsck device_name

device_name Specifies the location of the root (/) file system on the disk device of the bootenvironment you want to fall back to. The device name is entered in the formof /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz.

Mount the active boot environment root (/) slice to some directory, such as /mnt:# mount device_name /mnt


From the active boot environment root (/) slice, type:# /mnt/sbin/luactivate

luactivate activates the previous working boot environment and indicates the result.

Unmount /mnt# umount /mnt

Reboot.# init 6


x86: Falling Back to the Original Boot EnvironmentTo fall back to the original boot environment, choose the procedure the best fits yourcircumstances.

■ “x86: To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation With the GRUBMenu” on page 121

■ “x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menu” onpage 122

■ “x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation With the GRUB Menu andthe DVD or CD” on page 124

2

3

4

5

6

x86: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment


▼ x86: To Fall Back Despite Successful New BootEnvironment Activation With the GRUB MenuUse this procedure when you have successfully activated your new boot environment, but aredissatisfied with the results. You can quickly switch back to the original boot environment byusing the GRUB menu.

Note – The boot environments that are being switched must be GRUB boot environments thatwere created with GRUB software. If a boot environment was created with the Solaris 8, 9, or10 3/05 release, the boot environment is not a GRUB boot environment.



The GRUB menu is displayed. The Solaris OS is the original boot environment. Thesecond_disk boot environment was successfully activated and appears on the GRUB menu.The failsafe entries are for recovery if for some reason the primary entry does not boot.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris |

|Solaris failsafe |

|second_disk |


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




To boot to the original boot environment, use the arrow key to select the original bootenvironment and press Return.

To Fall Back Despite Successful New Boot Environment Activation

# su

# init 6


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris |

|Solaris failsafe |

|second_disk |

1

2

3

Example 6–1





+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




Select the original boot environment, Solaris.

▼ x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot EnvironmentActivation With the GRUB MenuIf you experience a failure while booting, use the following procedure to fall back to the originalboot environment. In this example, the GRUB menu is displayed correctly, but the new bootenvironment is not bootable. The device is /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0. The original bootenvironment, c0t4d0s0, becomes the active boot environment.

Caution – For the Solaris 10 3/05 release, the recommended action to fall back if the previousboot environment and new boot environment were on different disks included changing thehard disk boot order in the BIOS. Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, changing the BIOSdisk order is unnecessary and is strongly discouraged. Changing the BIOS disk order mightinvalidate the GRUB menu and cause the boot environment to become unbootable. If the BIOSdisk order is changed, reverting the order back to the original settings restores systemfunctionality.


To display the GRUB menu, reboot the system.# init 6

The GRUB menu is displayed.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris |

|Solaris failsafe |

|second_disk |


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




1

2




From the GRUB menu, select the original boot environment. The boot environment must havebeen created with GRUB software. A boot environment that was created before the Solaris 101/06 release is not a GRUB boot environment. If you do not have a bootable GRUB bootenvironment, then skip to this procedure, “x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot EnvironmentActivation With the GRUB Menu and the DVD or CD”on page 124.

Boot to single user mode by editing the Grub menu.

a. To edit the GRUB main menu, type e.The GRUB edit menu is displayed.root (hd0,2,a)

kernel /platform/i86pc/multiboot

module /platform/i86pc/boot_archive

b. Select the original boot environment's kernel entry by using the arrow keys.

c. To edit the boot entry, type e.The kernel entry is displayed in the GRUB edit menu.grub edit>kernel /boot/multiboot

d. Type -s and press Enter.The following example notes the placement of the -s option.grub edit>kernel /boot/multiboot -s

e. To begin the booting process in single user mode, type b.

If necessary, check the integrity of the root (/) file system for the fallback boot environment.# fsck mount_ point

mount_point A root (/) file system that is known and reliable

Mount the original boot environment root slice to some directory (such as /mnt):# mount device_name /mnt


From the active boot environment root slice, type:# /mnt/sbin/luactivate


Unmount /mnt.# umount /mnt

3

4

5

6

7

8



Reboot.# init 6


▼ x86: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot EnvironmentActivation With the GRUB Menu and the DVD or CDIf you experience a failure while booting, use the following procedure to fall back to the originalboot environment. In this example, the new boot environment was not bootable. Also, theGRUB menu does not display. The device is /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0. The original bootenvironment, c0t4d0s0, becomes the active boot environment.

Caution – For the Solaris 10 3/05 release, the recommended action to fall back if the previousboot environment and new boot environment were on different disks included changing thehard disk boot order in the BIOS. Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, changing the BIOSdisk order is unnecessary and is strongly discouraged. Changing the BIOS disk order mightinvalidate the GRUB menu and cause the boot environment to become unbootable. If the BIOSdisk order is changed, reverting the order back to the original settings restores systemfunctionality.


Insert the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or Solaris Software for x86 Platforms -1 CD.

Boot from the DVD or CD.# init 6



+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris 10 9/10 |

|Solaris 10 9/10 Serial Console ttya |

|Solaris 10 9/10 Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65x |

+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




9

1

2

3




Wait for the default option to boot or choose any option displayed.The installation screen is displayed.+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Select the type of installation you want to perform: |

| |

| 1 Solaris Interactive |

| 2 Custom JumpStart |

| 3 Solaris Interactive Text (Desktop session) |

| 4 Solaris Interactive Text (Console session) |

| 5 Apply driver updates |

| 6 Single user shell |

| |

| Enter the number of your choice followed by the <ENTER> key.|

| Alternatively, enter custom boot arguments directly. |

|

| If you wait 30 seconds without typing anything, |

| an interactive installation will be started. |

+----------------------------------------------------------------- --+

Choose the“Single user shell”option.The following message is displayed.Do you wish to automatically update the boot archive? y /n

Type: nStarting shell...

#

You are now in single user mode.

If necessary, check the integrity of the root (/) file system for the fallback boot environment.# fsck mount_ point

mount_point A root (/) file system that is known and reliable

Mount the original boot environment root slice to some directory (such as /mnt):# mount device_name /mnt


From the active boot environment root slice, type:# /mnt/sbin/luactivate

Do you want to fallback to activate boot environment c0t4d0s0

(yes or no)? yes


4

5

6

7

8

9



Unmount /mnt.# umount device_name


Reboot.# init 6


10

11



Maintaining Solaris Live Upgrade BootEnvironments (Tasks)

This chapter explains various maintenance tasks such as keeping a boot environment filesystem up to date or deleting a boot environment. This chapter contains the following sections:

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. The usage for themaintenance for a ZFS boot environment is the same. For procedures for migrating a UFS filesystem to a ZFS root pool or creating and installing a ZFS root pool, see Chapter 13, “Creating aBoot Environment for ZFS Root Pools.”

■ “Overview of Solaris Live Upgrade Maintenance” on page 128■ “Displaying the Status of All Boot Environments” on page 128■ “Updating a Previously Configured Boot Environment” on page 130■ “Canceling a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy Job” on page 131■ “Comparing Boot Environments” on page 131■ “Deleting an Inactive Boot Environment” on page 132■ “Displaying the Name of the Active Boot Environment” on page 133■ “Changing the Name of a Boot Environment” on page 134■ “Adding or Changing a Description Associated With a Boot Environment Name” on

page 135■ “Viewing the Configuration of a Boot Environment” on page 138

7C H A P T E R 7

127

Overview of Solaris Live Upgrade MaintenanceTABLE 7–1 Overview of Solaris Live Upgrade Maintenance


(Optional) View Status. ■ View whether a boot environment isactive, being activated, scheduled to beactivated, or in the midst of acomparison.

■ “Displaying the Status of All BootEnvironments” on page 128

■ Compare the active and inactive bootenvironments.

■ “Comparing Boot Environments” onpage 131

■ Display the name of the active bootenvironment.

■ “Displaying the Name of the ActiveBoot Environment” on page 133

■ View the configurations of a bootenvironment.

■ “Viewing the Configuration of a BootEnvironment” on page 138

(Optional) Update an inactive bootenvironment.

Copy file systems from the active bootenvironment again without changing theconfiguration of file systems.

“Updating a Previously Configured BootEnvironment” on page 130

(Optional) Other tasks. ■ Delete a boot environment. ■ “Deleting an Inactive BootEnvironment” on page 132

■ Change the name of a bootenvironment.

■ “Changing the Name of a BootEnvironment” on page 134

■ Add or change a description that isassociated with a boot environmentname.

■ “Adding or Changing a DescriptionAssociated With a Boot EnvironmentName” on page 135

■ Cancel scheduled jobs. ■ “Canceling a Scheduled Create,Upgrade, or Copy Job” on page 131

Displaying the Status of All Boot EnvironmentsUse the lustatus command to display the information about the boot environment. If no bootenvironment is specified, the status information for all boot environments on the system isdisplayed.

The following details for each boot environment are displayed:

■ Name – Name of each boot environment.

Overview of Solaris Live Upgrade Maintenance


■ Complete – Indicates that no copy or create operations are in progress. Also, the bootenvironment can be booted. Any current activity or failure in a create or upgrade operationcauses a boot environment to be incomplete. For example, if a copy operation is in processor scheduled for a boot environment, that boot environment is considered incomplete.

■ Active – Indicates if this is the active boot environment.■ ActiveOnReboot – Indicates if the boot environment becomes active on next reboot of the

system.■ CopyStatus – Indicates if the creation or copy of the boot environment is scheduled, active,

or in the process of being upgraded. A status of SCHEDULED prevents you from performinglive upgrade copy, rename, or upgrade operations.

▼ To Display the Status of All Boot EnvironmentsBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# lustatus BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the inactive boot environment to view status. If BE_name isomitted, lustatus displays status for all boot environments in the system.

In this example, the status for all boot environments is displayed.

# lustatus

boot environment Is Active Active Can Copy

Name Complete Now OnReboot Delete Status

------------------------------------------------------------------------

disk_a_S9 yes yes yes no -

disk_b_S10database yes no no yes COPYING

disk_b_S9a no no no yes -

Note – You could not perform copy, rename, or upgrade operations on disk_b_S9a because it isnot complete, nor on disk_b_S10database because a live upgrade operation is in progress.

1

2

Displaying the Status of All Boot Environments

Chapter 7 • Maintaining Solaris Live Upgrade Boot Environments (Tasks) 129


Updating a Previously Configured Boot EnvironmentYou can update the contents of a previously configured boot environment with the Copy menuor the lumake command. File Systems from the active (source) boot environment are copied tothe target boot environment. The data on the target is also destroyed. A boot environment musthave the status “complete” before you can copy from it. See “Displaying the Status of All BootEnvironments” on page 128 to determine a boot environment's status.

The copy job can be scheduled for a later time, and only one job can be scheduled at a time. Tocancel a scheduled copy, see “Canceling a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy Job” on page 131.

▼ To Update a Previously Configured Boot EnvironmentThis procedure copies source files over outdated files on a boot environment that waspreviously created.


Type:# lumake -n BE_name [-s source_BE] [-t time] [-m email_address]

-n BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that has file systems that areto be replaced.

-s source_BE (Optional) Specifies the name of the source boot environment thatcontains the file systems to be copied to the target boot environment. Ifyou omit this option, lumake uses the current boot environment as thesource.

-t time (Optional) Set up a batch job to copy over file systems on a specified bootenvironment at a specified time. The time is given in the format that isspecified by the man page, at(1).

-m email_address (Optional) Enables you to send an email of the lumake output to aspecified address on command completion. email_address is not checked.You can use this option only in conjunction with -t.

Updating a Previously Configured Boot Environment

In this example, file systems from first_disk are copied to second_disk. When the job iscompleted, an email is sent to Joe at anywhere.com.

1

2

Example 7–1

Updating a Previously Configured Boot Environment



# lumake -n second_disk -s first_disk -m [email protected]

The files on first_disk are copied to second_disk and email is sent for notification. To cancela scheduled copy, see “Canceling a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy Job” on page 131.

Canceling a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy JobA boot environment's scheduled creation, upgrade, or copy job can be canceled just prior to thetime the job starts. The job can be scheduled by the lumake command. At any time, only one jobcan be scheduled on a system.

▼ To Cancel a Scheduled Create, Upgrade, or Copy JobBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# lucancel

The job no longer executes at the time that is specified.

Comparing Boot EnvironmentsUse the lucompare command to check for differences between the active boot environment andother boot environments. To make a comparison, the inactive boot environment must be in acomplete state and cannot have a copy job that is pending. See “Displaying the Status of AllBoot Environments” on page 128.

The lucompare command generates a comparison of boot environments that includes thecontents of any non-global zones.

The specified boot environment cannot have any partitions that are mounted with lumount ormount.

1

2

Comparing Boot Environments



▼ To Compare Boot EnvironmentsBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# /usr/sbin/lucompare -i infile (or) -t -o outfile BE_name

-i infile Compare files that are listed in infile. The files to be compared should haveabsolute file names. If the entry in the file is a directory, then comparison isrecursive to the directory. Use either this option or -t, not both.

-t Compare only nonbinary files. This comparison uses the file(1) command oneach file to determine if the file is a text file. Use either this option or -i, not both.

-o outfile Redirect the output of differences to outfile.

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is compared to the active bootenvironment.


In this example, first_disk boot environment (source) is compared to second_disk bootenvironment and the results are sent to a file.

# /usr/sbin/lucompare -i /etc/lu/compare/ \

-o /var/tmp/compare.out second_disk

Deleting an Inactive Boot EnvironmentUse the ludelete command to remove a boot environment. Note the following limitations.

■ You cannot delete the active boot environment or the boot environment that is activated onthe next reboot.

■ The boot environment to be deleted must be complete. A complete boot environment is notparticipating in an operation that will change its status. Use “Displaying the Status of AllBoot Environments” on page 128 to determine a boot environment's status.

■ You cannot delete a boot environment that has file systems mounted with lumount.

1

2

Example 7–2

Deleting an Inactive Boot Environment



■ x86 only: Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, you cannot delete a boot environmentthat contains the active GRUB menu. Use the lumake or luupgrade commands to reuse theboot environment. To determine which boot environment contains the active GRUB menu,see Chapter 13, “Managing the Oracle Solaris Boot Archives (Tasks),” in SystemAdministration Guide: Basic Administration.

▼ To Delete an Inactive Boot EnvironmentBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# ludelete BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the inactive boot environment that is to be deleted

Deleting an Inactive Boot Environment

In this example, the boot environment, second_disk, is deleted.

# ludelete second_disk

Displaying the Name of the Active Boot EnvironmentUse the lucurr command to display the name of the currently running boot environment. If noboot environments are configured on the system, the message “No Boot Environments aredefined” is displayed. Note that lucurr reports only the name of the current boot environment,not the boot environment that is active on the next reboot. See “Displaying the Status of AllBoot Environments” on page 128 to determine a boot environment's status.

▼ To Display the Name of the Active Boot EnvironmentBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# /usr/sbin/lucurr

1

2

Example 7–3

1

2

Displaying the Name of the Active Boot Environment






Displaying the Name of the Active Boot Environment

In this example, the name of the current boot environment is displayed.

# /usr/sbin/lucurr

solaris10

Changing the Name of a Boot EnvironmentRenaming a boot environment is often useful when you upgrade the boot environment fromone Solaris release to another release. For example, following an operating system upgrade, youmight rename the boot environment solaris8 to solaris10.

Use the lurename command to change the inactive boot environment's name.

x86 only – Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, the GRUB menu is automatically updatedwhen you use the Rename menu or lurename command. The updated GRUB menu displays theboot environment's name in the list of boot entries. For more information about the GRUBmenu, see “Booting Multiple Boot Environments” on page 56.

To determine the location of the GRUB menu's menu.lst file, see Chapter 13, “Managing theOracle Solaris Boot Archives (Tasks),” in System Administration Guide: Basic Administration.

TABLE 7–2 Limitations for Naming a Boot Environment

Limitation For Instructions

The name must not exceed 30 characters in length.

The name can consist only of alphanumeric characters and otherASCII characters that are not special to the UNIX shell.

See the “Quoting” section of sh(1).

The name can contain only single-byte, 8-bit characters.

The name must be unique on the system.

A boot environment must have the status “complete” before yourename it.

See “Displaying the Status of All Boot Environments” on page 128to determine a boot environment's status.

You cannot rename a boot environment that has file systemsmounted with lumount or mount.

Example 7–4

Changing the Name of a Boot Environment




▼ To Change the Name of an Inactive Boot EnvironmentBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# lurename -e BE_name -n new_name

-e BE_name Specifies the inactive boot environment name to be changed

-n new_name Specifies the new name of the inactive boot environment

In this example, second_disk is renamed to third_disk.

# lurename -e second_disk -n third_disk

Adding or Changing a Description Associated With a BootEnvironment Name

You can associate a description with a boot environment name. The description never replacesthe name. Although a boot environment name is restricted in length and characters, thedescription can be of any length and of any content. The description can be simple text or ascomplex as a gif file. You can create this description at these times:

■ When you create a boot environment with the lucreate command and use the -A option■ After the boot environment has been created by using the ludesc command

For more information about using the -A option withlucreate

“To Create a Boot Environment for the First Time” onpage 64

For more information about creating the descriptionafter the boot environment has been created

ludesc(1M)

▼ To Add or Change a Description for a BootEnvironment Name With Text


1

2

1

Adding or Changing a Description Associated With a Boot Environment Name



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=ludesc-1m


Type:# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n BE_name ’BE_description’

-n BE_name 'BE_description' Specifies the boot environment name and the new descriptionto be associated with the name

Adding a Description to a Boot Environment Name With Text

In this example, a boot environment description is added to a boot environment that is namedsecond_disk. The description is text that is enclosed in single quotes.

# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n second_disk ’Solaris 10 9/10 test build’

▼ To Add or Change a Description for a BootEnvironment Name With a File


Type:# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n BE_name -f file_name

-n BE_name Specifies the boot environment name

file_name Specifies the file to be associated with a boot environment name

Adding a Description to a Boot Environment Name With a File

In this example, a boot environment description is added to a boot environment that is namedsecond_disk. The description is contained in a gif file.

# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n second_disk -f rose.gif

▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Name From a TextDescriptionThe following command returns the name of the boot environment associated with thespecified description.

2

Example 7–5

1

2

Example 7–6





Type:# /usr/sbin/ludesc -A ’BE_description’

-A 'BE_description' Specifies the description to be associated with the boot environmentname.

Determining a Boot Environment Name From a Description

In this example, the name of the boot environment, second_disk, is determined by using the -Aoption with the description.

# /usr/sbin/ludesc -A ’Solaris 10 9/10 test build’

second_disk

▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Name From aDescription in a FileThe following command displays the boot environment's name that is associated with a file.The file contains the description of the boot environment.


Type:# /usr/sbin/ludesc -f file_name

-f file_name Specifies the name of the file that contains the description of the bootenvironment.

Determining a Boot Environment Name From a Description in a File

In this example, the name of the boot environment, second_disk, is determined by using the -foption and the name of the file that contains the description.

# /usr/sbin/ludesc -f rose.gif

second_disk

1

2

Example 7–7

1

2

Example 7–8





▼ To Determine a Boot Environment Description From aNameThis procedure displays the description of the boot environment that is named in thecommand.


Type:# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n BE_name

-n BE_name Specifies the boot environment name.

Determining a Boot Environment Description From a Name

In this example, the description is determined by using the -n option with the bootenvironment name.

# /usr/sbin/ludesc -n second_disk

Solaris 10 9/10 test build

Viewing the Configuration of a Boot EnvironmentUse the lufslist command to list the configuration of a boot environment. The outputcontains the disk slice (file system), file system type, and file system size for each bootenvironment mount point.

▼ To View the Configuration of a Boot EnvironmentBecome superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about roles, see“Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: Security Services.

Type:# lufslist -n BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment to view file system specifics

1

2

Example 7–9

1

2

Viewing the Configuration of a Boot Environment




The following example displays a list.

Filesystem fstype size(Mb) Mounted on

------------------------------------------------------------------

/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1 swap 512.11 -

/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s3 ufs 3738.29 /

/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s4 ufs 510.24 /opt

Note – For an example of a list that contains non-global zones, see “To View the Configurationof a Boot Environment's Non-Global Zone File Systems” on page 154.

Viewing the Configuration of a Boot Environment


140

Upgrading the Solaris OS on a System WithNon-Global Zones Installed

This chapter describes using Solaris Live Upgrade to upgrade a system that has non-globalzones installed.

Note – This chapter describes Solaris Live Upgrade for UFS file systems. For procedures formigrating a UFS file system with non-global zones to a ZFS root pool, see Chapter 14, “SolarisLive Upgrade For ZFS With Non-Global Zones Installed.”


■ For a summary of changes when you upgrade a system that contains non-global zones withSolaris Live Upgrade, see “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade and Installed Non-GlobalZones (Overview)” on page 141.

■ For step-by-step instructions for creating a new boot environment and upgrading a systemwith Solaris Live Upgrade, see “Creating and Upgrading a Boot Environment WhenNon-Global Zones Are Installed (Tasks)” on page 148.

■ For an example with brief instructions for creating a new boot environment and upgradinga system with Solaris Live Upgrade, see “Upgrading a System With Non-Global ZonesInstalled (Example)” on page 152.

■ For general information about creating non-global zones, see System Administration Guide:Oracle Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Oracle Solaris Zones.

Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade and InstalledNon-Global Zones (Overview)

Starting with the Solaris Solaris 10 8/07 release, you can upgrade or patch a system that containsnon-global zones with Solaris Live Upgrade. If you have a system that contains non-globalzones, Solaris Live Upgrade is the recommended program to upgrade and to add patches. Other

8C H A P T E R 8

141

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1592&id=sysadrm


upgrade programs might require extensive upgrade time, because the time required to completethe upgrade increases linearly with the number of installed non-global zones. If you arepatching a system with Solaris Live Upgrade, you do not have to take the system to single-usermode and you can maximize your system's uptime. The following list summarizes changes toaccommodate systems that have non-global zones installed.■ A new package, SUNWlucfg, is required to be installed with the other Solaris Live Upgrade

packages, SUNWlur and SUNWluu. This package is required for any system, not just a systemwith non-global zones installed.

■ Creating a new boot environment from the currently running boot environment remainsthe same as in previous releases with one exception. You can specify a destination disk slicefor a shared file system within a non-global zone. For more information, see “Creating andUpgrading a Boot Environment When Non-Global Zones Are Installed (Tasks)” onpage 148.

■ The lumount command now provides non-global zones with access to their correspondingfile systems that exist on inactive boot environments. When the global zone administratoruses the lumount command to mount an inactive boot environment, the boot environmentis mounted for non-global zones as well. See “Using the lumount Command on a SystemThat Contains Non-Global Zones” on page 156.

■ Comparing boot environments is enhanced. The lucompare command now generates acomparison of boot environments that includes the contents of any non-global zone. See“To Compare Boot Environments for a System With Non-Global Zones Installed” onpage 155.

■ Listing file systems with the lufslist command is enhanced to list file systems for both theglobal zone and the non-global zones. See “To View the Configuration of a BootEnvironment's Non-Global Zone File Systems” on page 154.

Understanding Solaris Zones and Solaris Live UpgradeThe Solaris Zones partitioning technology is used to virtualize operating system services andprovide an isolated and secure environment for running applications. A non-global zone is avirtualized operating system environment created within a single instance of the Solaris OS, theglobal zone. When you create a non-global zone, you produce an application executionenvironment in which processes are isolated from the rest of the system.

Solaris Live Upgrade is a mechanism to copy the currently running system onto new slices.When non-global zones are installed, they can be copied to the inactive boot environment alongwith the global zone's file systems.

Figure 8–1 shows a non-global zone that is copied to the inactive boot environment along withthe global zone's file system.

Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade and Installed Non-Global Zones (Overview)


■ In this example of a system with a single disk, the root (/) file system is copied to c0t0d0s4.All non-global zones that are associated with the file system are also copied to s4. The/export file system and /swap volume are shared between the current boot environment,bootenv1, and the inactive boot environment, bootenv2. The lucreate command is thefollowing:

# lucreate -c bootenv1 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs -n bootenv2

FIGURE 8–1 Creating a Boot Environment – Copying Non-Global Zones

/export /export

Creating a Boot Environment –Copying Non-global Zones



Shared file systems

c0t0d0 c0t1d0Two Hard Disks

Single disk command:# lucreate -c bootenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs \-n bootenv2

One Hard Disk

root (/)/zone1

Upgrade Upgrade

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)/zone10

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

root (/)/zone1

/swap

root (/)/zone1

Two disks command:# lucreate -c bootenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \-n bootenv2

Copy

Copy


Chapter 8 • Upgrading the Solaris OS on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed 143

■ In this example of a system with two disks, the root (/) file system is copied to c0t1d0s0. Allnon-global zones that are associated with the file system are also copied to s0. The /exportfile system and /swap volume are shared between the current boot environment, bootenv1,and the inactive boot environment, bootenv2. The lucreate command is the following:

# lucreate -c bootenv1 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs -n bootenv2

Figure 8–2 shows that a non-global zone is copied to the inactive boot environment.



■ In this example of a system with a single disk, the root (/) file system is copied to c0t0d0s4.All non-global zones that are associated with the file system are also copied to s4. Thenon-global zone, zone1, has a separate file system that was created by the zonecfg add fscommand. The zone path is /zone1/root/export. To prevent this file system from beingshared by the inactive boot environment, the file system is placed on a separate slice,c0t0d0s6. The /export file system and /swap volume are shared between the current bootenvironment, bootenv1, and the inactive boot environment, bootenv2. The lucreatecommand is the following:

FIGURE 8–2 Creating a Boot Environment – Copying a Shared File System From a Non-Global Zone

/export

Creating a Boot Environment –Non-global Zones Copying a Shared File System



Shared file systems

c0t0d0 c0t1d0Two Hard Disks

Single disk command:# lucreate -c bootenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs \-m /zone1/root/export:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s6:ufs:zone1 \-n bootenv2

One Hard Disk

Upgrade Upgrade

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

root (/)/zone1

/zone1/root/export

/zone1/root/export

/swap

root (/)/zone1

Two disks command:# lucreate -c bootenv1 \-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:ufs \-m /zone1/root/export:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s4:ufs:zone1 \-n bootenv2

Copy

Copy

Copy

Copy

/export

/zone1/root/export

/zone1/root/export

root (/)/zone1

c0t0d0

/swap

root (/)/zone1



# lucreate -c bootenv1 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s4:ufs \

-m /zone1/root/export:/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s6:ufs:zone1 -n bootenv2

■ In this example of a system with two disks, the root (/) file system is copied to c0t1d0s0. Allnon-global zones that are associated with the file system are also copied to s0. Thenon-global zone, zone1, has a separate file system that was created by the zonecfg add fscommand. The zone path is /zone1/root/export. To prevent this file system from beingshared by the inactive boot environment, the file system is placed on a separate slice,c0t1d0s4. The /export file system and /swap volume are shared between the current bootenvironment, bootenv1, and the inactive boot environment, bootenv2. The lucreatecommand is the following:

# lucreate -c bootenv1 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \

-m /zone1/root/export:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s4:ufs:zone1 -n bootenv2

Guidelines for Using Solaris Live Upgrade With Non-GlobalZones (Planning)

Planning for using non-global zones includes the limitations described below.

TABLE 8–1 Limitations When Upgrading With Non-Global Zones

Problem Description

Consider these issues when usingSolaris Live Upgrade on a systemwith zones installed. It is critical toavoid zone state transitions duringlucreate and lumount operations.

■ When you use the lucreate command to create an inactive bootenvironment, if a given non-global zone is not running, then the zonecannot be booted until the lucreate operation has completed.

■ When you use the lucreate command to create an inactive bootenvironment if a given non-global zone is running, the zone shouldnot be halted or rebooted until the lucreate operation hascompleted.

■ When an inactive boot environment is mounted with the lumountcommand, you cannot boot non-global zones or reboot them,although zones that were running before the lumount operation cancontinue to run.

■ Because a non-global zone can be controlled by a non-global zoneadministrator as well as by the global zone administrator, to preventany interaction, halt all zones during lucreate or lumountoperations.

Guidelines for Using Solaris Live Upgrade With Non-Global Zones (Planning)


TABLE 8–1 Limitations When Upgrading With Non-Global Zones (Continued)Problem Description

Problems can occur when theglobal zone administrator does notnotify the non-global zoneadministrator of an upgrade withSolaris Live Upgrade.

When Solaris Live Upgrade operations are underway, non-global zoneadministrator involvement is critical. The upgrade affects the work of theadministrators, who will be addressing the changes that occur as a resultof the upgrade. Zone administrators should ensure that any localpackages are stable throughout the sequence, handle any post-upgradetasks such as configuration file adjustments, and generally schedulearound the system outage.

For example, if a non-global zone administrator adds a package while theglobal zone administrator is copying the file systems with the lucreatecommand, the new package is not copied with the file systems and thenon-global zone administrator is unaware of the problem.

Creating a Boot Environment When a Non-Global ZoneIs on a Separate File SystemCreating a new boot environment from the currently running boot environment remains thesame as in previous releases with one exception. You can specify a destination disk slice for ashared file system within a non-global zone. This exception occurs under the followingconditions:

■ If on the current boot environment the zonecfg add fs command was used to create aseparate file system for a non-global zone

■ If this separate file system resides on a shared file system, such as /zone/root/export

To prevent this separate file system from being shared in the new boot environment, thelucreate command enables specifying a destination slice for a separate file system for anon-global zone. The argument to the -m option has a new optional field, zonename. This newfield places the non-global zone's separate file system on a separate slice in the new bootenvironment. For more information about setting up a non-global zone with a separate filesystem, see zonecfg(1M).

Note – By default, any file system other than the critical file systems (root (/), /usr, and /opt filesystems) is shared between the current and new boot environments. Updating shared files inthe active boot environment also updates data in the inactive boot environment. For example,the /export file system is a shared file system. If you use the -m option and the zonename option,the non-global zone's file system is copied to a separate slice and data is not shared. This optionprevents non-global zone file systems that were created with the zonecfg add fs commandfrom being shared between the boot environments.

Guidelines for Using Solaris Live Upgrade With Non-Global Zones (Planning)


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=zonecfg-1m

Creating and Upgrading a Boot Environment WhenNon-Global Zones Are Installed (Tasks)

The following sections provide step-by-step procedures for upgrading when non-global zonesare installed.■ “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade When Non-Global Zones Are Installed on a System

(Tasks)” on page 148For an example with abbreviated steps, see “Upgrading a System With Non-Global ZonesInstalled (Example)” on page 152.

▼ Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade WhenNon-Global Zones Are Installed on a System (Tasks)The following procedure provides detailed instructions for upgrading with Solaris LiveUpgrade for a system with non-global zones installed.

Before running Solaris Live Upgrade for the first time, you must install the latest Solaris LiveUpgrade packages from installation media and install the patches listed in the SunSolve Infodoc206844. Search for the Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.The latest packages and patches ensure that you have all the latest bug fixes and new features inthe release. Ensure that you install all the patches that are relevant to your system beforeproceeding to create a new boot environment.

The following substeps describe the steps in the SunSolve Infodoc 206844.

a. Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.

Note – Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information aboutroles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: SecurityServices.

b. From the SunSolve web site, follow the instructions in Infodoc 206844 to remove and addSolaris Live Upgrade packages.The following instructions summarizes the Infodoc steps for removing and adding thepackages.

■ Remove existing Solaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprisethe software needed to upgrade or patch by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packagesinclude existing software, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existingpackages and install the new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade,

1

Creating and Upgrading a Boot Environment When Non-Global Zones Are Installed (Tasks)





upgrading or patching to the target release fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new startingwith the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If you are using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from arelease previous to Solaris 10 8/07, you do not need to remove this package.

# pkgrm SUNWlucfg SUNWluu SUNWlur

■ Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages.

You can install the packages by using the liveupgrade20 command that is on theinstallation DVD or CD. The liveupgrade20 command requires Java software. If yoursystem does not have Java software installed, then you need to use the pkgadd commandto install the packages. See the SunSolve Infodoc for more information.■ If you are using the Solaris Operating System DVD, change directories and run the

installer:■ Change directories.


Note – For SPARC based systems, the path to the installer is different for releasesprevious to the Solaris 10 10/08 release:

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/s0/Solaris_10/Tools/Installers

■ Run the installer

# ./liveupgrade20

The Solaris installation program GUI is displayed. If you are using a script, youcan prevent the GUI from displaying by using the -noconsole and -nodisplay

options.■ If you are using the Solaris Software – 2 CD, you can run the installer without

changing the path.

% ./installer

■ Verify that the packages have been installed successfully.

# pkgchk -v SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

c. If you are storing the patches on a local disk, create a directory such as/var/tmp/lupatches.

d. From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.

e. Change to the patch directory as in this example.# cd /var/tmp/lupatches



f. Install the patches.# patchadd -M path-to-patchespatch-id patch-id

path-to-patches is the path to the patches directory, such as /var/tmp/lupatches. patch-idis the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.


g. Reboot the system if necessary. Certain patches require a reboot to be effective.x86 only: Rebooting the system is required. Otherwise, Solaris Live Upgrade fails.# init 6


Create the new boot environment.# lucreate [-A ’BE_description’] [-c BE_name] \

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options[:zonename] [-m ...] -n BE_name



-c BE_nameAssigns the name BE_name to the active boot environment. This option is not required andis only used when the first boot environment is created. If you run lucreate for the first timeand you omit the -c option, the software creates a default name for you.

-m mountpoint:device[,metadevice]:fs_options[:zonename] [-m ...]Specifies the file systems' configuration of the new boot environment in the vfstab. The filesystems that are specified as arguments to -m can be on the same disk or they can be spreadacross multiple disks. Use this option as many times as needed to create the number of filesystems that are needed.■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap partition.■ device field can be one of the following:

■ The name of a disk device, of the form /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz■ The name of a Solaris Volume Manager volume, of the form /dev/md/dsk/dnum■ The name of a Veritas Volume Manager volume, of the form /dev/md/vxfs/dsk/dnum■ The keyword merged, indicating that the file system at the specified mount point is to

be merged with its parent

2



■ fs_options field can be one of the following:■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.■ vxfs, which indicates a Veritas file system.■ swap, which indicates a swap volume. The swap mount point must be a – (hyphen).■ For file systems that are logical devices (mirrors), several keywords specify actions to


■ zonename specifies that a non-global zone's separate file system be placed on a separateslice. This option is used when the zone's separate file system is in a shared file systemsuch as /zone1/root/export. This option copies the zone's separate file system to a newslice and prevents this file system from being shared. The separate file system was createdwith the zonecfg add fs command.

In the following example, a new boot environment named newbe is created. The root (/) filesystem is placed on c0t1d0s4. All non-global zones in the current boot environment are copiedto the new boot environment. The non-global zone named zone1 is given a separate mountpoint on c0t1d0s1.

Note – By default, any file system other than the critical file systems (root (/), /usr, and /opt filesystems) is shared between the current and new boot environments. The /export file system isa shared file system. If you use the -m option, the non-global zone's file system is placed on aseparate slice and data is not shared. This option prevents zone file systems that were createdwith the zonecfg add fs command from being shared between the boot environments. Seezonecfg(1M) for details.

# lucreate -n newbe -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s4:ufs -m /export:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:ufs:zone1

Upgrade the boot environment.The operating system image to be used for the upgrade is taken from the network.# luupgrade -u -n BE_name -s os_image_path

-u Upgrades an operating system image on a boot environment


-s os_image_path Specifies the path name of a directory that contains an operating systemimage

In this example, the new boot environment, newbe, is upgraded from a network installationimage.

# luupgrade -n newbe -u -s /net/server/export/Solaris_10/combined.solaris_wos

3



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=zonecfg-1m

(Optional) Verify that the boot environment is bootable.The lustatus command reports if the boot environment creation is complete and bootable.# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------

c0t1d0s0 yes yes yes no -

newbe yes no no yes -

Activate the new boot environment.# luactivate BE_name

BE_name specifies the name of the boot environment that is to be activated.

Note – For an x86 based system, the luactivate command is required when booting a bootenvironment for the first time. Subsequent activations can be made by selecting the bootenvironment from the GRUB menu. For step-by-step instructions, see “x86: Activating a BootEnvironment With the GRUB Menu” on page 114.

To successfully activate a boot environment, that boot environment must meet severalconditions. For more information, see “Activating a Boot Environment” on page 110.

Reboot.# init 6

Caution – Use only the init or shutdown commands to reboot. If you use the reboot, halt, oruadmin commands, the system does not switch boot environments. The most recently activeboot environment is booted again.

The boot environments have switched and the new boot environment is now the current bootenvironment.

(Optional) Fall back to a different boot environment.If the new boot environment is not viable or you want to switch to another boot environment,see Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment (Tasks).”

Upgrading a System With Non-Global Zones Installed(Example)

The following procedure provides an example with abbreviated instructions for upgrading withSolaris Live Upgrade.

4

5

6

7

Upgrading a System With Non-Global Zones Installed (Example)


For detailed explanations of steps, see “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade WhenNon-Global Zones Are Installed on a System (Tasks)” on page 148.

Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade WhenNon-Global Zones Are Installed on a SystemThe following example provides abbreviated descriptions of the steps to upgrade a system withnon-global zones installed. In this example, a new boot environment is created by using thelucreate command on a system that is running the Solaris 10 release. This system hasnon-global zones installed and has a non-global zone with a separate file system on a shared filesystem, zone1/root/export. The new boot environment is upgraded to the Solaris 10 9/10release by using the luupgrade command. The upgraded boot environment is activated byusing the luactivate command.


1. Install required patches.Ensure that you have the most recently updated patch list by consultinghttp://sunsolve.sun.com. Search for the Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolveweb site. In this example, /net/server/export/patches is the path to the patches.

# patchadd /net/server/export/patches

# init 6

2. Remove the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the current boot environment.


3. Insert the Solaris DVD or CD. Then install the replacement Solaris Live upgradepackages from the target release.

# pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/Solaris_10/Product SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

4. Create a boot environment.In the following example, a new boot environment named newbe is created. The root (/) filesystem is placed on c0t1d0s4. All non-global zones in the current boot environment arecopied to the new boot environment. A separate file system was created with the zonecfgadd fs command for zone1. This separate file system /zone/root/export is placed on aseparate file system, c0t1d0s1. This option prevents the separate file system from beingshared between the current boot environment and the new boot environment.

# lucreate -n newbe -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s4:ufs -m /export:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s1:ufs:zone1

5. Upgrade the new boot environment.

Upgrading a System With Non-Global Zones Installed (Example)





In this example, /net/server/export/Solaris_10/combined.solaris_wos is the path tothe network installation image.

# luupgrade -n newbe -u -s /net/server/export/Solaris_10/combined.solaris_wos

6. (Optional) Verify that the boot environment is bootable.The lustatus command reports if the boot environment creation is complete.

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------


newbe yes no no yes -

7. Activate the new boot environment.

# luactivate newbe

# init 6

The boot environment newbe is now active.8. (Optional) Fall back to a different boot environment. If the new boot environment is not

viable or you want to switch to another boot environment, see Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery:Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment (Tasks).”

Administering Boot Environments That Contain Non-GlobalZones

The following sections provide information about administering boot environments thatcontain non-global zones.

▼ To View the Configuration of a Boot Environment'sNon-Global Zone File SystemsUse this procedure to display a list of file systems for both the global zone and the non-globalzones.


Display the list of file systems.# lufslist -n BE_name

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment to view file system specifics

1

2

Administering Boot Environments That Contain Non-Global Zones



List File Systems With Non-Global Zones

The following example displays a list of file systems that include non-global zones.

# lufslist -n s3

boot environment name: s3

This boot environent is currently active.

This boot environment will be active on next system boot.

Filesystem fstype device size Mounted on Mount Options

------------------------------------------------------------------

/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s1 swap 2151776256 - -

/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s3 ufs 10738040832 / -

/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s7 ufs 10487955456 /export -

zone <zone1> within boot environment <s3>

/dev/dsk/c0t0d0s5 ufs 5116329984 /export -

▼ To Compare Boot Environments for a System WithNon-Global Zones InstalledThe lucompare command now generates a comparison of boot environments that includes thecontents of any non-global zone.


Compare the current and new boot environments.# /usr/sbin/lucompare -i infile (or) -t -o outfile BE_name

-i infile Compare files that are listed in infile. The files to be compared should haveabsolute file names. If the entry in the file is a directory, the comparison isrecursive to the directory. Use either this option or -t, not both.

-t Compare only nonbinary files. This comparison uses the file(1) command oneach file to determine if the file is a text file. Use either this option or -i, not both.

-o outfile Redirect the output of differences to outfile.

BE_name Specifies the name of the boot environment that is compared to the active bootenvironment.


In this example, current boot environment (source) is compared to second_disk bootenvironment and the results are sent to a file.

Example 8–1

1

2

Example 8–2




# /usr/sbin/lucompare -i /etc/lu/compare/ -o /var/tmp/compare.out second_disk

Using the lumountCommand on a System ThatContains Non-Global ZonesThe lumount command provides non-global zones with access to their corresponding filesystems that exist on inactive boot environments. When the global zone administrator uses thelumount command to mount an inactive boot environment, the boot environment is mountedfor non-global zones as well.

In the following example, the appropriate file systems are mounted for the boot environment,newbe, on /mnt in the global zone. For non-global zones that are running, mounted, or ready,their corresponding file systems within newbe are also made available on /mnt within each zone.

# lumount -n newbe /mnt

For more information about mounting, see the lumount(1M) man page.




Solaris Live Upgrade (Examples)

This chapter provides examples of creating a boot environment, then upgrading and activatingthe new boot environment which then becomes the currently running system.


This chapter contains the following sections:■ “Example of Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 157■ “Example of Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror)” on page 165■ “Example of Migrating From an Existing Volume to a Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1

Volume” on page 168■ “Example of Creating an Empty Boot Environment and Installing a Solaris Flash Archive” on

page 168

Example of Upgrading With Solaris Live UpgradeIn this example, a new boot environment is created by using the lucreate command on asystem that is running the Solaris 9 release. The new boot environment is upgraded to theSolaris 10 9/10 release by using the luupgrade command. The upgraded boot environment isactivated by using the luactivate command. An example of falling back to the original bootenvironment is also given.

Prepare to Use Solaris Live UpgradeBefore running Solaris Live Upgrade for the first time, you must install the latest Solaris LiveUpgrade packages from installation media and install the patches listed in the SunSolve Infodoc206844. Search for the Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

9C H A P T E R 9

157


The latest packages and patches ensure that you have all the latest bug fixes and new features inthe release. Ensure that you install all the patches that are relevant to your system beforeproceeding to create a new boot environment.

The following steps describe the steps in the SunSolve Infodoc 206844.


1. Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.


2. From the SunSolve web site, follow the instructions in Infodoc 206844 to remove and addSolaris Live Upgrade packages.

a. Remove existing Solaris Live Upgrade packages.

The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprisethe software needed to upgrade or patch by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packagesinclude existing software, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existingpackages and install the new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade,upgrading or patching to the target release fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new startingwith the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If you are using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from arelease previous to Solaris 10 8/07, you do not need to remove this package.


b. Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages.

You can install the packages by using the liveupgrade20 command that is on theinstallation DVD or CD or by using the pkgadd command. The liveupgrade20command requires Java software. If your system does not have Java software installed,then you need to use the pkgadd command to install the packages. See the SunSolveInfodoc for more information.■ If you are using the Solaris Operating System DVD, change directories and run the

installer:■ Change directories.


Example of Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade






Note – For SPARC based systems, the path to the installer is different for releasesprevious to the Solaris 10 10/08 release:

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/s0/Solaris_10/Tools/Installers

■ Run the installer

# ./liveupgrade20 -noconsole - nodisplay

The -noconsole and -nodisplay options prevent the character user interface(CUI) from displaying.

Note – The Solaris Live Upgrade CUI is no longer supported.

■ If you are using the Solaris Software – 2 CD, you can run the installer withoutchanging the path.

% ./installer

■ Verify that the packages have been installed successfully.

# pkgchk -v SUNWlucfg SUNWlur SUNWluu

3. Install the patches listed in Infodoc 206844.

a. If you are storing the patches on a local disk, create a directory such as/var/tmp/lupatches.

b. From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.

c. Change to the patch directory as in this example.

# cd /var/tmp/lupatches

d. Install the patches.

# patchadd -M path-to-patchespatch-id patch-id

path-to-patches is the patch to the patch directory such as /var/tmp/lupatches.patch-id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.


e. Reboot the system if necessary. Certain patches require a reboot to be effective.x86 only: Rebooting the system is required. Otherwise, Solaris Live Upgrade fails.

# init 6


Chapter 9 • Solaris Live Upgrade (Examples) 159


To Create a Boot EnvironmentThe source boot environment is named c0t4d0s0 by using the -c option. Naming the sourceboot environment is required only when the first boot environment is created. For moreinformation about naming using the -c option, see the description in “To Create a BootEnvironment for the First Time” Step 2.

The new boot environment is named c0t15d0s0. The -A option creates a description that isassociated with the boot environment name.

The root (/) file system is copied to the new boot environment. Also, a new swap slice is createdrather than sharing the source boot environment's swap slice.

# lucreate -A ’BE_description’ -c /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0 -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t15d0s0:ufs\

-m -:/dev/dsk/c0t15d0s1:swap -n /dev/dsk/c0t15d0s0

To Upgrade the Inactive Boot EnvironmentThe inactive boot environment is named c0t15d0s0. The operating system image to be used forthe upgrade is taken from the network.

# luupgrade -n c0t15d0s0 -u -s /net/ins-svr/export/Solaris_10 \

combined.solaris_wos

To Check if Boot Environment Is BootableThe lustatus command reports if the boot environment creation is complete. lustatus alsoshows if the boot environment is bootable.

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------


c0t15d0s0 yes no no yes -

To Activate the Inactive Boot EnvironmentThe c0t15d0s0 boot environment is made bootable with the luactivate command. Thesystem is then rebooted and c0t15d0s0 becomes the active boot environment. The c0t4d0s0boot environment is now inactive.



# luactivate c0t15d0s0

# init 6

(Optional) To Fall Back to the Source BootEnvironmentThe following procedures for falling back depend on your new boot environment activationsituation:

■ For SPARC based systems:■ The activation is successful, but you want to return to the original boot environment. See

Example 9–1.■ The activation fails and you can boot back to the original boot environment. See

Example 9–2.■ The activation fails and you must boot back to the original boot environment by using

media or a net installation image. See Example 9–3.■ For x86 based systems, starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release and when you use the

GRUB menu:■ The activation fails, the GRUB menu is displayed correctly, but the new boot

environment is not bootable. See Example 9–4■ The activation fails and the GRUB menu does not display. See Example 9–5.

EXAMPLE 9–1 SPARC: To Fall Back Despite Successful Boot Environment Creation

In this example, the original c0t4d0s0 boot environment is reinstated as the active bootenvironment although it was activated successfully. The device name is first_disk.

# /sbin/luactivate first_disk

# init 6

EXAMPLE 9–2 SPARC: To Fall Back From a Failed Boot Environment Activation

In this example, the new boot environment was not bootable. You must return to the OKprompt before booting from the original boot environment, c0t4d0s0, in single-user mode.

OK boot net -s

# /sbin/luactivate first_disk


(yes or no)? yes

# init 6

The original boot environment, c0t4d0s0, becomes the active boot environment.



EXAMPLE 9–3 SPARC: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment by Using a DVD, CD, or NetInstallation Image

In this example, the new boot environment was not bootable. You cannot boot from theoriginal boot environment and must use media or a net installation image. The device is/dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0. The original boot environment, c0t4d0s0, becomes the active bootenvironment.

OK boot net -s

# fsck /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0

# mount /dev/dsk/c0t4d0s0 /mnt

# /mnt/sbin/luactivate


(yes or no)? yes

# umount /mnt

# init 6

EXAMPLE 9–4 x86: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment By Using the GRUB Menu

Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, the following example provides the steps to fall backby using the GRUB menu.

In this example, the GRUB menu is displayed correctly, but the new boot environment is notbootable. To enable a fallback, the original boot environment is booted in single-user mode.



2. To display the GRUB menu, reboot the system.

# init 6



+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris |

|Solaris failsafe |

|second_disk |


+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




3. From the GRUB menu, select the original boot environment. The boot environment musthave been created with GRUB software. A boot environment that was created before theSolaris 10 1/06 release is not a GRUB boot environment. If you do not have a bootableGRUB boot environment, then skip to Example 9–5.





EXAMPLE 9–4 x86: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment By Using the GRUB Menu(Continued)

4. Edit the GRUB menu by typing: e.5. Select kernel /boot/multiboot by using the arrow keys and type e. The grub edit menu is

displayed.

grub edit>kernel /boot/multiboot

6. Boot to single user mode, by typing -s.

grub edit>kernel /boot/multiboot -s

7. Boot and mount the boot environment. Then activate it.

# b





(yes or no)? yes

# umount /mnt

# init 6

EXAMPLE 9–5 x86: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu by Using the DVDor CD

Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release, the following example provides the steps to fall backby using the DVD or CD.

In this example, the new boot environment was not bootable. Also, the GRUB menu does notdisplay. To enable a fallback, the original boot environment is booted in single-user mode.

1. Insert the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or Solaris Software for x86Platforms - 1 CD.



3. Boot from the DVD or CD.

# init 6



+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Solaris 10 9/10 |

|Solaris 10 9/10 Serial Console ttya |





EXAMPLE 9–5 x86: To Fall Back to the Original Boot Environment With the GRUB Menu by Using the DVDor CD (Continued)

|Solaris 10 9/10 Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65x |

+-------------------------------------------------------------------+




4. Wait for the default option to boot or choose any option displayed.The installation screen is displayed.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------+

|Select the type of installation you want to perform: |

| |

| 1 Solaris Interactive |

| 2 Custom JumpStart |

| 3 Solaris Interactive Text (Desktop session) |

| 4 Solaris Interactive Text (Console session) |

| 5 Apply driver updates |

| 6 Single user shell |

| |

| Enter the number of your choice followed by the <ENTER> key.|

| Alternatively, enter custom boot arguments directly. |

|

| If you wait 30 seconds without typing anything, |

| an interactive installation will be started. |

+----------------------------------------------------------------- --+

5. Choose the “Single user shell” option.The following message is displayed.

Do you wish to automatically update the boot archive? y /n

6. Type: n

Starting shell...

#

You are now in single user mode.7. Mount the boot environment. Then activate and reboot.





(yes or no)? yes

# umount /mnt

# init 6



Example of Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1Volume (Mirror)

This example shows you how to do the following tasks:

■ Create a RAID-1 volume (mirror) on a new boot environment■ Break the mirror and upgrade one half of the mirror■ Attach the other half of the mirror, the concatenation, to the new mirror

Figure 9–1 shows the current boot environment, which contains three physical disks.

1. Create a new boot environment, second_disk, that contains a mirror.The following command performs these tasks.■ lucreate configures a UFS file system for the mount point root (/). A mirror, d10, is

created. This mirror is the receptacle for the current boot environment's root (/) filesystem, which is copied to the mirror d10. All data on the mirror d10 is overwritten.

■ Two slices, c0t1d0s0 and c0t2d0s0, are specified to be used as submirrors. These twosubmirrors are attached to mirror d10.

# lucreate -c first_disk -n second_disk \


-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:attach \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0:attach

2. Activate the second_disk boot environment.

# /sbin/luactivate second_disk

# init 6

3. Create another boot environment, third_disk.The following command performs these tasks.

FIGURE 9–1 Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror)

root (/)

c0t0d0 c0t1d0 c0t2d0

Original System with 3 physical disks

Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror)

Create boot environments with mirrors

Example of Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror)


■ lucreate configures a UFS file system for the mount point root (/). A mirror, d20, iscreated.

■ Slice c0t1d0s0 is removed from its current mirror and is added to mirror d20. Thecontents of the submirror, the root (/) file system, are preserved and no copy occurs.

# lucreate -n third_disk \


-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:detach,attach,preserve

4. Upgrade the new boot environment, third_disk

# luupgrade -u -n third_disk \

-s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/OS_image

5. Add a patch to the upgraded boot environment.

# luupgrade -t n third_disk -s /net/patches 222222-01

6. Activate the third_disk boot environment to make this boot environment the currentlyrunning system.

# /sbin/luactivate third_disk

# init 6

7. Delete the boot environment second_disk.

# ludelete second_disk

8. The following commands perform these tasks.■ Clear mirror d10.■ Check for the number for the concatenation of c0t2d0s0.■ Attach the concatenation that is found by the metastat command to the mirror d20. The

metattach command synchronizes the newly attached concatenation with theconcatenation in mirror d20. All data on the concatenation is overwritten.

# metaclear d10

# metastat -p | grep c0t2d0s0

dnum 1 1 c0t2d0s0

# metattach d20 dnum

num Is the number found in the metastat command for the concatenation

The new boot environment, third_disk, has been upgraded and is the currently runningsystem. third_disk contains the root (/) file system that is mirrored.

Figure 9–2 shows the entire process of detaching a mirror and upgrading the mirror by usingthe commands in the preceding example.



FIGURE 9–2 Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror) (continued)

c0t0d0

d10

root (/)

Copy

Detaching and Upgrading One Side of a RAID-1 Volume (Mirror) (Continued)

New boot environment second_disk

root (/)

c0t1d0

root (/)

c0t2d0

– Create new boot environment– Create mirror d10– Create 2 single-slice concatenations– Activate the second_disk boot environment

Commands: # lucreate -c first_disk -n second_disk \ -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d10:ufs,mirror \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:attach \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0:attach # /usr/sbin/luactivate second_disk # init 6

d20

third_disk

root (/)

c0t1d0

root (/)

c0t2d0

– Delete second_disk boot environment– Attach concatenation c0t2d0– Synchronize mirror, which overwrites c0t2d0

Commands: # ludelete second_disk # metaclear d10 # metastat -p | grep c0t2d0s0 # metattach d20 d<num>

– Create new boot environment third_disk– Break RAID-1 volume and no copy

Commands: # lucreate -n third_disk \ -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d20:ufs,mirror \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:detach,attach,preserve

d10d20

second_diskNew boot environment

third_disk

root (/)

c0t1d0

root (/)

c0t2d0

– Upgrade third_disk – Add a patch to third_disk – Activate third_disk

Commands: # luupgrade -u -n third_disk \ -s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/ # luupgrade -t -s /net/patches 222222-01 # /usr/sbin/luactivate third_disk # init 6

d10d20

second_diskthird_disk

root (/)

c0t1d0

root (/)

c0t2d0



Example of Migrating From an Existing Volume to a SolarisVolume Manager RAID-1 Volume

Solaris Live Upgrade enables the creation of a new boot environment on RAID–1 volumes(mirrors). The current boot environment's file systems can be on any of the following:

■ A physical storage device■ A Solaris Volume Manager controlled RAID–1 volume■ A Veritas VXFS controlled volume

However, the new boot environment's target must be a Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1volume. For example, the slice that is designated for a copy of the root (/) file system must be/dev/vx/dsk/rootvol. rootvol is the volume that contains the root (/) file system.

In this example, the current boot environment contains the root (/) file system on a volume thatis not a Solaris Volume Manager volume. The new boot environment is created with the root(/) file system on the Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1 volume c0t2d0s0. The lucreatecommand migrates the current volume to the Solaris Volume Manager volume. The name ofthe new boot environment is svm_be. The lustatus command reports if the new bootenvironment is ready to be activated and be rebooted. The new boot environment is activated tobecome the current boot environment.

# lucreate -n svm_be -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d1:mirror,ufs \

-m /:/dev/dsk/c0t2d0s0:attach

# lustatus

# luactivate svm_be

# lustatus

# init 6

Example of Creating an Empty Boot Environment andInstalling a Solaris Flash Archive

The following procedures cover the three-step process:

■ Creating the empty boot environment■ Installing the archive■ Activating the boot environment which then becomes the currently running boot

environment.

The lucreate command creates a boot environment that is based on the file systems in theactive boot environment. When you use the lucreate command with the -s - option, lucreatequickly creates an empty boot environment. The slices are reserved for the file systemsspecified, but no file systems are copied. The boot environment is named, but not actually

Example of Migrating From an Existing Volume to a Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1 Volume


created until installed with a Solaris Flash archive. When the empty boot environment isinstalled with an archive, file systems are installed on the reserved slices. The boot environmentis then activated.

To Create an Empty Boot EnvironmentIn this first step, an empty boot environment is created. Slices are reserved for the file systemsthat are specified, but no copy of file systems from the current boot environment occurs. Thenew boot environment is named second_disk.

# lucreate -s - -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \

-n second_disk

The boot environment is ready to be populated with a Solaris Flash archive.

Figure 9–3 shows the creation of an empty boot environment.

FIGURE 9–3 Creating an Empty Boot Environment

/swap

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

root (/)

Original System2 Physical Disks

/swap

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

root (/) second_disk

Empty BootEnvironment Creation

Command: # lucreate -s - \ -m /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \ -n second_disk

Assignsname andthere is nocopy of file

systems

Example of Creating an Empty Boot Environment and Installing a Solaris Flash Archive


To Install a Solaris Flash Archive on the New BootEnvironmentIn this second step, an archive is installed on the second_disk boot environment that wascreated in the previous example. The archive is located on the local system. The operatingsystem versions for the -s and -a options are both Solaris 10 9/10 releases. The archive is namedSolaris_10.flar.


-s /net/installmachine/export/Solaris_10/OS_image \

-a /net/server/archive/10.flar

The boot environment is ready to be activated.

To Activate the New Boot EnvironmentIn this last step, the second_disk boot environment is made bootable with the luactivatecommand. The system is then rebooted and second_disk becomes the active bootenvironment.

# luactivate second_disk

# init 6

■ For step-by-step information about creating an empty boot environment, see “To Create anEmpty Boot Environment for a Solaris Flash Archive” on page 77.

■ For step-by-step information about creating a Solaris Flash archive, see Chapter 3, “CreatingSolaris Flash Archives (Tasks),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Solaris FlashArchives (Creation and Installation).

■ For step-by-step information about activating a boot environment or falling back to theoriginal boot environment, see Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery: Falling Back to the OriginalBoot Environment (Tasks).”

Example of Creating an Empty Boot Environment and Installing a Solaris Flash Archive





Solaris Live Upgrade (Command Reference)

The following list shows commands that you can type at the command line. The Solaris LiveUpgrade includes man pages for all the listed command-line utilities.

Solaris Live Upgrade Command-Line Options

Task Command

Activate an inactive boot environment. luactivate(1M)

Cancel a scheduled copy or create job. lucancel(1M)

Compare an active boot environment with an inactiveboot environment.

lucompare(1M)

Recopy file systems to update an inactive bootenvironment.

lumake(1M)

Create a boot environment. lucreate(1M)

Name the active boot environment. lucurr(1M)

Delete a boot environment. ludelete(1M)

Add a description to a boot environment name. ludesc(1M)

List critical file systems for each boot environment. lufslist(1M)

Enable a mount of all of the file systems in a bootenvironment. This command enables you to modifythe files in a boot environment while that bootenvironment is inactive.

lumount(1M)

Rename a boot environment. lurename(1M)

List status of all boot environments. lustatus(1M)

10C H A P T E R 1 0

171

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=luactivate-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lucancel-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lucompare-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lumake-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lucreate-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lucurr-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=ludelete-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=ludesc-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lufslist-1m


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lurename-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lustatus-1m

Task Command

Enable an unmount of all the file systems in a bootenvironment. This command enables you to modifythe files in a boot environment while that bootenvironment is inactive.

luumount(1M)

Upgrade an OS or install a flash archive on an inactiveboot environment.

luupgrade(1M)

Solaris Live Upgrade Command-Line Options


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=luumount-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=luupgrade-1m

Upgrading and Migrating With Solaris LiveUpgrade to a ZFS Root PoolThis part provides an overview and instructions for using Solaris Live Upgrade to createand upgrade an inactive boot environment on ZFS storage pools. Also, you can migrateyour UFS root (/) file system to a ZFS root pool.

P A R T I I

173

174

Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS (Overview)

With Solaris Live Upgrade, you can migrate your UFS file systems to a ZFS root pool and createZFS root file systems from an existing ZFS root pool.

Note – Creating boot environments with Solaris Live Upgrade is new in the Solaris 10 10/08release. When performing a Solaris Live Upgrade for a UFS file system, both the command-lineparameters and operation of Solaris Live Upgrade remain unchanged. To perform a Solaris LiveUpgrade on a system with UFS file systems, see Part I, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade,”of this book.

The following sections provide an overview of these tasks:

■ “Introduction to Using Solaris Live Upgrade With ZFS” on page 176.■ You can migrate a UFS file system with or without SVM volumes.

■ “Migrating From a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool” on page 177■ “Migrating a UFS File System With Solaris Volume Manager Volumes Configured to a

ZFS Root File System” on page 179■ You can either create a new ZFS boot environment within the existing root pool or on

another root pool.■ “Creating a New Boot Environment Within the Same Root Pool” on page 180■ “Creating a New Boot Environment on Another Root Pool” on page 182

■ “Creating a New Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently RunningSystem” on page 184.

■ “Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed” onpage 184.

11C H A P T E R 1 1

175

What's New in the Solaris 10 10/09 ReleaseStarting with the Solaris 10 10/09 release, you can set up a JumpStart profile to identify a flasharchive of a ZFS root pool.

A Flash archive can be created on a system that is running a UFS root file system or a ZFS rootfile system. A Flash archive of a ZFS root pool contains the entire pool hierarchy, except for theswap and dump volumes, and any excluded datasets. The swap and dump volumes are createdwhen the Flash archive is installed.

You can use the Flash archive installation method as follows:

■ Generate a Flash archive that can be used to install and boot a system with a ZFS root filesystem.

■ Perform a JumpStart installation of a system by using a ZFS Flash archive.

Note – Creating a ZFS Flash archive backs up an entire root pool, not individual bootenvironments. Individual datasets within the pool can be excluded by using the flarcreateand flar command's -D option.

For detailed instructions and limitations, see “Installing a ZFS Root File System (Oracle SolarisFlash Archive Installation)” in Oracle Solaris ZFS Administration Guide.

Introduction to Using Solaris Live Upgrade With ZFSIf you have a UFS file system, Solaris Live Upgrade works the same as in previous releases. Youcan now migrate from UFS file systems to a ZFS root pool and create new boot environmentswithin a ZFS root pool. For these tasks, the lucreate command has been enhanced with the -poption. The command syntax is the following:

# lucreate [-c active_BE_name] -n BE_name [-p zfs_root_pool]

The -p option specifies the ZFS pool in which a new boot environment resides. This option canbe omitted if the source and target boot environments are within the same pool.

The lucreate command -m option is not supported with ZFS. Other lucreate commandoptions work as usual, with some exceptions. For limitations, see “System Requirements andLimitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 187.

What's New in the Solaris 10 10/09 Release


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=githk

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=githk

Migrating From a UFS File System to a ZFS Root PoolIf you create a boot environment from the currently running system, the lucreate commandcopies the UFS root (/) file system to a ZFS root pool. The copy process might take time,depending on your system.

When you are migrating from a UFS file system, the source boot environment can be a UFS root(/) file system on a disk slice. You cannot create a boot environment on a UFS file system from asource boot environment on a ZFS root pool.

Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System to ZFS RootPoolThe following commands create a ZFS root pool and a new boot environment from a UFS root(/) file system in the ZFS root pool. A ZFS root pool must exist before the lucreate operationand must be created with slices rather than whole disks to be upgradeable and bootable. Thedisk cannot have an EFI label, but must be an SMI label. For more limitations, see “SystemRequirements and Limitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 187.

Figure 11–1 shows the zpool command that creates a root pool, rpool on a separate slice,c0t1d0s5. The disk slice c0t0d0s0 contains a UFS root (/) file system. In the lucreatecommand, the -c option names the currently running system, c0t0d0, that is a UFS root (/) filesystem. The -n option assigns the name to the boot environment to be created, new-zfsBE. The-p option specifies where to place the new boot environment, rpool. The UFS /export filesystem and the /swap volume are not copied to the new boot environment.

Migrating From a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool

Chapter 11 • Solaris Live Upgrade and ZFS (Overview) 177

EXAMPLE 11–1 Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System to ZFS Root Pool

This example shows the same commands as in Figure 11–1. The commands create a new rootpool, rpool, and create a new boot environment in the pool from a UFS root (/) file system. Inthis example, the zfs list command shows the ZFS root pool created by the zpool command.The next zfs list command shows the datasets created by the lucreate command.

# zpool create rpool c0t1d0s5

# zfs list

NAME USED AVAIL REFER MOUNTPOINT

rpool 9.29G 57.6G 20K /rpool

FIGURE 11–1 Migrating From a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool

rpool

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

c0t0d0 c0t1d0

Create a ZFS root pool on a slice.# zpool create rpool c0t1d0s5

1

Copy the UFS boot environment to rpool.# lucreate -c c0t0d0 -n new-zfsBE -p rpool

2


Copy

/export

/opt

/swap

/user

root (/)

/export

/opt

/swap

/user

root (/)

rpool /ROOT /ROOT/new-zfsBE /swap /dump



EXAMPLE 11–1 Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System to ZFS Root Pool (Continued)

# lucreate -c c0t0d0 -n new-zfsBE -p rpool

# zfs list



rpool/ROOT 5.38G 57.6G 18K /rpool/ROOT

rpool/ROOT/new-zfsBE 5.38G 57.6G 551M /tmp/.alt.luupdall.110034

rpool/dump 1.95G - 1.95G -

rpool/swap 1.95G - 1.95G -

The new boot environment is rpool/ROOT/new-zfsBE. The boot environment, new-zfsBE, isready to be upgraded and activated.

Migrating a UFS File System With Solaris VolumeManager Volumes Configured to a ZFS Root FileSystemYou can migrate your UFS file system if your system has Solaris Volume Manager (SVM)volumes. To create a UFS boot environment from an existing SVM configuration, you create anew boot environment from your currently running system. Then create the ZFS bootenvironment from the new UFS boot environment.

Overview of Solaris Volume Manager (SVM). ZFS uses the concept of storage pools to managephysical storage. Historically, file systems were constructed on top of a single physical device.To address multiple devices and provide for data redundancy, the concept of a volume managerwas introduced to provide the image of a single device. Thus, file systems would not have to bemodified to take advantage of multiple devices. This design added another layer of complexity.This complexity ultimately prevented certain file system advances because the file system hadno control over the physical placement of data on the virtualized volumes.

ZFS storage pools replace SVM. ZFS completely eliminates the volume management. Insteadof forcing you to create virtualized volumes, ZFS aggregates devices into a storage pool. Thestorage pool describes such physical characteristics of storage device layout and dataredundancy and acts as an arbitrary data store from which file systems can be created. Filesystems are no longer constrained to individual devices, enabling them to share space with allfile systems in the pool. You no longer need to predetermine the size of a file system, as filesystems grow automatically within the space allocated to the storage pool. When new storage isadded, all file systems within the pool can immediately use the additional space withoutadditional work. In many ways, the storage pool acts as a virtual memory system. When amemory DIMM is added to a system, the operating system doesn't force you to invoke somecommands to configure the memory and assign it to individual processes. All processes on thesystem automatically use the additional memory.



EXAMPLE 11–2 Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With SVM Volumes to ZFS Root Pool

When migrating a system with SVM volumes, the SVM volumes are ignored. You can set upmirrors within the root pool as in the following example.

In this example, the lucreate command with the -m option creates a new boot environmentfrom the currently running system. The disk slice c1t0d0s0 contains a UFS root (/) file systemconfigured with SVM volumes. The zpool command creates a root pool, c1t0d0s0, and aRAID-1 volume (mirror), c2t0d0s0. In the second lucreate command, the -n option assignsthe name to the boot environment to be created, c0t0d0s0. The -s option, identifies the UFSroot (/) file system. The -p option specifies where to place the new boot environment, rpool.

# lucreate -n ufsBE -m /:/dev/md/dsk/d104:ufs

# zpool create rpool mirror c1t0d0s0 c2t1d0s0

# lucreate -n c0t0d0s0 -s ufsBE -p zpool

The boot environment, c0t0d0s0, is ready to be upgraded and activated.

Creating a New Boot Environment From a ZFS Root PoolYou can either create a new ZFS boot environment within the same root pool or on a new rootpool. This section contains the following overviews:■ “Creating a New Boot Environment Within the Same Root Pool” on page 180■ “Creating a New Boot Environment on Another Root Pool” on page 182

Creating a New Boot Environment Within the SameRoot PoolWhen creating a new boot environment within the same ZFS root pool, the lucreatecommand creates a snapshot from the source boot environment and then a clone is made fromthe snapshot. The creation of the snapshot and clone is almost instantaneous and the disk spaceused is minimal. The amount of space ultimately required depends on how many files arereplaced as part of the upgrade process. The snapshot is read-only, but the clone is a read-writecopy of the snapshot. Any changes made to the clone boot environment are not reflected ineither the snapshot or the source boot environment from which the snapshot was made.

Note – As data within the active dataset changes, the snapshot consumes space by continuing toreference the old data. As a result, the snapshot prevents the data from being freed back to thepool. For more information about snapshots, see Chapter 7, “Working With Oracle Solaris ZFSSnapshots and Clones,” in Oracle Solaris ZFS Administration Guide.

When the current boot environment resides on the same ZFS pool, the -p option is omitted.

Creating a New Boot Environment From a ZFS Root Pool


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=gavvx

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=gavvx

Figure 11–2 shows the creation of a ZFS boot environment from a ZFS root pool. The slicec0t0d0s0 contains a the ZFS root pool, rpool. In the lucreate command, the -n option assignsthe name to the boot environment to be created, new-zfsBE. A snapshot of the original rootpool is created rpool@new-zfsBE. The snapshot is used to make the clone that is a new bootenvironment, new-zfsBE. The boot environment, new-zfsBE, is ready to be upgraded andactivated.

EXAMPLE 11–3 Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool

This example shows the same command as in Figure 11–2 that creates a new boot environmentin the same root pool. The lucreate command names the currently running boot environmentwith the -c zfsBE option, and the -n new-zfsBE creates the new boot environment. The zfslist command shows the ZFS datasets with the new boot environment and snapshot.

# lucreate -c zfsBE -n new-zfsBE

# zfs list

AME USED AVAIL REFER MOUNTPOINT

FIGURE 11–2 Creating a New Boot Environment on the Same Root Pool

Currently Running System

Creating a New Boot Environment on the Same Root Pool

rpool /ROOT /ROOT/zfsBE /swap /dump

c0t0d0

.

.

.

Create a new boot environment in rpool.# lucreate -n new-zfsBE

1

rpool /ROOT /ROOT/zfsBE /ROOT/zfsBE@new-zfsBE /ROOT/new-zfsBE /swap /dump

c0t0d0

.

.

.



EXAMPLE 11–3 Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool (Continued)



rpool/ROOT/zfsBE 5.38G 57.6G 551M

rpool/ROOT/zfsBE@new-zfsBE 66.5K - 551M -




Creating a New Boot Environment on Another RootPoolYou can use the lucreate command to copy an existing ZFS root pool into another ZFS rootpool. The copy process might take some time depending on your system.

Figure 11–3 shows the zpool command that creates a ZFS root pool, rpool2, on c0t1d0s5

because a bootable ZFS root pool does not yet exist. The lucreate command with the -n optionassigns the name to the boot environment to be created, new-zfsBE. The -p option specifieswhere to place the new boot environment.



EXAMPLE 11–4 Creating a Boot Environment on a Different ZFS Root Pool

This example shows the same commands as in Figure 11–3 that create a new root pool and thena new boot environment in the newly created root pool. In this example, the zpool createcommand creates rpool2. The zfs list command shows that no ZFS datasets are created inrpool2. The datasets are created with the lucreate command.

# zpool create rpool2 c0t2d0s5

# zfs list


rpool2 9.29G 57.6G 20K /rpool2

rpool 9.29G 57.6G 20K /.new.lulib.rs.109262

rpool/ROOT 5.46G 57.6G 18K legacy




The new ZFS root pool, rpool2, is created on disk slice c0t2d0s5.

# lucreate -n new-zfsBE -p rpool2

# zfs list


FIGURE 11–3 Creating a New Boot Environment on Another Root Pool

.

.

.

Create the new root pool on a separate slice.# zpool create rpool2 c0t1d0s0

1

Create the new boot environment on rpool2.# lucreate -n new-zfsBE -p rpool2

2

Creating a New Boot Environment in Another Root Pool


rpool2 /ROOT /ROOT/new-zfsBE /swap /dump

Copy

c0t0d0 c0t1d0


rpool2c0t0d0 c0t1d0

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.



EXAMPLE 11–4 Creating a Boot Environment on a Different ZFS Root Pool (Continued)


rpool2/ROOT/ 5.38G 57.6G 18K /rpool2/ROOT

rpool2/ROOT/new-zfsBE 5.38G 57.6G 551M /tmp/.new.luupdall.109859

rpool2/dump 3.99G - 3.99G -

rpool2/swap 3.99G - 3.99G -






The new boot environment, new-zfsBE, is created on rpool2 along with the other datasets,ROOT, dump and swap. The boot environment, new-zfsBE, is ready to be upgraded and activated.

Creating a New Boot Environment From a Source Other Thanthe Currently Running System

If you are creating a boot environment from a source other than the currently running system,you must use the lucreate command with the -s option. The -s option works the same as for aUFS file system. The -s option provides the path to the alternate root (/) file system. Thisalternate root (/) file system is the source for the creation of the new ZFS root pool. Thealternate root can be either a UFS (/) root file system or a ZFS root pool. The copy processmight take time, depending on your system.

EXAMPLE 11–5 Creating a Boot Environment From an Alternate Root (/) File System

The following command creates a new ZFS root pool from an existing ZFS root pool. The -noption assigns the name to the boot environment to be created, new-zfsBE. The -s optionspecifies the boot environment, source-zfsBE, to be used as the source of the copy instead ofthe currently running boot environment. The -p option specifies to place the new bootenvironment in newpool2.

# lucreate -n new-zfsBE -s source-zfsBE -p rpool2

The boot environment, new-zfsBE, is ready to be upgraded and activated.

Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System WithNon-Global Zones Installed

You can use Solaris Live Upgrade to migrate your non-global zones to a ZFS root file system.For overview, planning and step-by-step procedures, see Chapter 14, “Solaris Live Upgrade ForZFS With Non-Global Zones Installed.”

Creating a New Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently Running System


Additional ResourcesFor additional information about the topics included in this chapter, see the resources listed inTable 11–1.

TABLE 11–1 Additional Resources

Resource Location

For ZFS information, including overview, planning,and step-by-step instructions

Oracle Solaris ZFS Administration Guide

For using Solaris Live Upgrade on a system with UFSfile systems

Part I, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade,” of thisbook

Additional Resources


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=zfsadmin

186

Solaris Live Upgrade for ZFS (Planning)

This chapter provides guidelines and requirements for review before performing a migration ofa UFS file system to a ZFS file system or before creating a new ZFS boot environment from anexisting ZFS root pool.

Note – Creating boot environments with Solaris Live Upgrade is new in the Solaris 10 10/08release. When you perform a Solaris Live Upgrade for a UFS file system, both thecommand-line parameters and operation of Solaris Live Upgrade remain unchanged. Toperform a Solaris Live Upgrade on a system with UFS file systems, see Part I, “Upgrading WithSolaris Live Upgrade,” of this book.

System Requirements and Limitations When Using SolarisLive Upgrade

Be sure that you have read and understand the following requirements and limitations beforeperforming a migration of a UFS file system to a ZFS file system or before creating a new ZFSboot environment from an existing ZFS root pool. These requirements are in addition to therequirements listed in Chapter 6, “ZFS Root File System Installation (Planning),” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade.

TABLE 12–1 Requirements and Limitations

Requirement or Limitation Description Information

You must have at the least the Solaris 1010/08 release installed.

Migrating from a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool withSolaris Live Upgrade or creating a new boot environmentin a root pool is new in the Solaris 10 10/08 release. Thisrelease contains the software needed to use Solaris LiveUpgrade with ZFS. You must have at least this releaseinstalled to use ZFS.

12C H A P T E R 1 2

187

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=planzfs-1


TABLE 12–1 Requirements and Limitations (Continued)Requirement or Limitation Description Information

Disk space The minimum amount of available pool space for abootable ZFS root file system depends on the amount ofphysical memory, the disk space available, and thenumber of boot environments to be created.

For an explanation, see “DiskSpace Requirements for aZFS Installation” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Planning forInstallation and Upgrade.

When you migrate from a UFS root (/) filesystem to a ZFS root pool, consider theserequirements.

■ Migration is possible only from a UFS file system to aZFS file system.

■ File systems other than a UFS file system cannotbe migrated to a ZFS root pool.

■ A UFS file system cannot be created from a ZFSroot pool.

■ Before migrating, a ZFS storage pool must exist.

■ The ZFS storage pool must be created with slicesrather than whole disks to be upgradeable andbootable.

■ The pool created with slices can be mirrored, butnot a RAID-Z or non-redundant configurationof multiple disks. The SVM device informationmust be already available in the /dev/md/[r]dskdirectory.

■ The pool must have an SMI label. AnEFI-labeled disk cannot be booted.

■ x86 only: The ZFS pool must be in a slice with anfdisk partition.

■ For step-by-stepprocedures,see“Migrating a UFS FileSystem to a ZFS FileSystem” on page 191.

■ For information aboutSVM, see “Overview ofSolaris Volume ManagerComponents” in OracleSolaris 10 9/10Installation Guide:Planning for Installationand Upgrade.

■ For information aboutfdisk partitions, see“PartitioningRecommendations” inOracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide:Planning for Installationand Upgrade.

■ For information aboutother restrictions for anEFI-labled disk, see“Overview of DiskManagement” in SystemAdministration Guide:Devices and File Systems.

When you migrate shared file systems,shared file systems cannot be copied to aseparate slice on the new ZFS root pool.

For example, when performing a Solaris Live Upgradewith a UFS root (/) file system, you can use the -m optionto copy the /export file system to another device. You donot have the -m option of copying the shared file systemto a ZFS pool.

System Requirements and Limitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=ggzej






http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=volumes-22













http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-5093&id=disksconcepts-1




TABLE 12–1 Requirements and Limitations (Continued)Requirement or Limitation Description Information

When you are migrating a UFS root filesystem that contains non-global zones,shared file systems are not migrated.

On a system with a UFS root (/) file system andnon-global zones installed, the non-global zones aremigrated if the zone is in a critical file system as part ofthe UFS to ZFS migration. Or, the zone is cloned whenyou upgrade within the same ZFS pool. If a non-globalzone exists in a shared UFS (/) file system, to migrate to aZFS root pool, you must first upgrade the zone, as inprevious Solaris releases.

■ For an explanation ofcritical and shared filesystems, see “File SystemTypes” on page 22.

■ For step-by–stepinstructions whennon-global zones areinstalled, see Chapter 14,“Solaris Live UpgradeFor ZFS WithNon-Global ZonesInstalled.”

Do not use the ZFS rename command. The Solaris Live Upgrade feature is unaware of the namechange and subsequent commands, such as ludelete,will fail. In fact, do not rename your ZFS pools or filesystems if you have existing boot environments that youwant to continue to use.

Set dataset properties before the lucreatecommand is used.

Solaris Live Upgrade creates the datasets for the bootenvironment and ZFS volumes for the swap area anddump device but does not account for any existingdataset property modifications. This means that if youwant a dataset property enabled in the new bootenvironment, you must set the property before thelucreate operation. For example:

# zfs set compression=on rpool/ROOT

See “Introducing ZFSProperties” in Oracle SolarisZFS Administration Guide.

When creating a ZFS boot environmentwithin the same ZFS root pool, you cannotuse the lucreate command include andexclude options to customize the content.

You cannot use the -f, -o, -y, -Y, and -z options toinclude or exclude files from the primary bootenvironment when creating a boot environment in thesame ZFS root pool. However, you can use these optionsin the following cases:■ Creating a boot environment from a UFS file system

to a UFS file system■ Creating a boot environment from a UFS file system

to a ZFS root pool■ Creating a boot environment from a ZFS root pool to

a different ZFS root pool

For information about usingthe include and excludeoptions, see “To Create aBoot Environment andCustomize the Content” onpage 84.

You cannot use Solaris Live Upgrade toupgrade non-root ZFS file systems.

System Requirements and Limitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade

Chapter 12 • Solaris Live Upgrade for ZFS (Planning) 189

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=gazss





Resource Location

For more information on Planning a ZFS installation Chapter 6, “ZFS Root File System Installation(Planning),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10 InstallationGuide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade











Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools

This chapter provides step-by-step procedures on how to create a ZFS boot environment whenyou use Solaris Live Upgrade.

Note – Migrating from a UFS file system to a ZFS root pool or creating ZFS boot environmentswith Solaris Live Upgrade is new in the Solaris 10 10/08 release. To use Solaris Live Upgrade ona system with UFS file systems, see Part I, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade,” of this book.

This chapter provides procedures for the following tasks:

■ “Migrating a UFS File System to a ZFS File System” on page 191■ “Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool” on page 197■ “Creating a Boot Environment In a New Root Pool” on page 201■ “Creating a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently Running System”

on page 206■ “Falling Back to a ZFS Boot Environment” on page 207

For procedures on using ZFS when non-global zones are installed, see Chapter 14, “Solaris LiveUpgrade For ZFS With Non-Global Zones Installed.”

Migrating a UFS File System to a ZFS File SystemThis procedure describes how to migrate a UFS file system to a ZFS file system. Creating a bootenvironment provides a method of copying critical file systems from an active UFS bootenvironment to a ZFS root pool. The lucreate command copies the critical file systems to anew boot environment within an existing ZFS root pool. User-defined (shareable) file systemsare not copied and are not shared with the source UFS boot environment. Also, /swap is notshared between the UFS file system and ZFS root pool. For an overview of critical and shareablefile systems, see “File System Types” on page 22.

13C H A P T E R 1 3

191

▼ How to Migrate a UFS File System to a ZFS File System

Note – To migrate an active UFS root (/) file system to a ZFS root pool, you must provide thename of the root pool. The critical file systems are copied into the root pool.



Note – Using Solaris Live Upgrade to create new ZFS boot environments requires at least theSolaris 10 10/08 release to be installed. Previous releases do not have the ZFS and Solaris LiveUpgrade software to perform the tasks.



b. From the SunSolve web site, follow the instructions in Infodoc 206844 to remove and addSolaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages include existingsoftware, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages and installthe new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading to the targetrelease fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If youare using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a release previous to Solaris 10 8/07, you donot need to remove this package.# pkgrm SUNWlucfg SUNWluu SUNWlur

c. Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release to which you are upgrading.For instructions, see “Installing Solaris Live Upgrade”on page 60.

d. Before running Solaris Live Upgrade, you are required to install the following patches. Thesepatches ensure that you have all the latest bug fixes and new features in the release.Ensure that you have the most recently updated patch list by consulting SunSolve. Search forthe Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

1

Migrating a UFS File System to a ZFS File System






■ If you are storing the patches on a local disk, create a directory such as/var/tmp/lupatches and download the patches to that directory.

■ From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.■ Change to the patch directory.


■ Install the patches with the patchadd command.

# patchadd patch_id

patch_id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.

Note – The patches need to be applied in the order that is specified in Infodoc 206844.

■ Reboot the system if necessary. Certain patches require a reboot to be effective.

x86 only: Rebooting the system is required or Solaris Live Upgrade fails.

# init 6

You now have the packages and patches necessary for a successful migration.

Create a ZFS root pool.

The ZFS root pool must be on a single slice to be bootable and upgradeable.# zpool create rpool c0t1d0s5

rpool Specifies the name of the new ZFS root pool to be created.

c0t1d0s5 Creates the new root pool on the disk slice, c0t1d0s5.

For information about creating a new root pool, see the Oracle Solaris ZFS AdministrationGuide.

Migrate your UFS root (/) file system to the new ZFS root pool.# lucreate [-c ufsBE] -n new-zfsBE -p rpool

-c ufsBE Assigns the name ufsBE to the current UFS boot environment. This option isnot required and is used only when the first boot environment is created. Ifyou run the lucreate command for the first time and you omit the -c option,the software creates a default name for you.

-n new-zfsBE Assigns the name new-zfsBE to the boot environment to be created. The namemust be unique on the system.

-p rpool Places the newly created ZFS root (/) file system into the ZFS root pooldefined in rpool.

2

3


Chapter 13 • Creating a Boot Environment for ZFS Root Pools 193




The creation of the new ZFS boot environment might take a while. The UFS file system data isbeing copied to the ZFS root pool. When the inactive boot environment has been created, youcan use the luupgrade or luactivate command to upgrade or activate the new ZFS bootenvironment.

(Optional) Verify that the boot environment is complete.In this example, the lustatus command reports whether the boot environment creation iscomplete and bootable.# lustatus



-----------------------------------------------------------------

ufsBE yes yes yes no -

new-zfsBE yes no no yes -

(Optional) Verify the basic dataset information on the system.The list command displays the names of all datasets on the system. In this example, rpool isthe name of the ZFS pool and new-zfsBE is the name of the newly created ZFS bootenvironment.# zfs list







The mount points listed for the new boot environment are temporary until the luactivatecommand is executed. The /dump and /swap volumes are not shared with the original UFS bootenvironment, but are shared within the ZFS root pool and boot environments within the rootpool.

You can now upgrade and activate the new boot environment. See Example 13–1.

Migrating a UFS Root (/) File System to a ZFS Root Pool

In this example, the new ZFS root pool, rpool, is created on a separate slice, C0t0d0s4. Thelucreate command migrates the currently running UFS boot environment,c0t0d0, to the newZFS boot environment, new-zfsBE, and places the new boot environment in rpool.

# zpool create rpool C0t0d0s4

# zfs list



# lucreate -c c0t0d0 -n new-zfsBE -p rpool

Analyzing system configuration.

Current boot environment is named <c0t0d0>.

Creating initial configuration for primary boot environment <c0t0d0>.

4

5

Example 13–1



The device </dev/dsk/c0t0d0> is not a root device for any boot

environment; cannot get BE ID.

PBE configuration successful: PBE name <c0t0d0> PBE Boot Device

</dev/dsk/c0t0d0>.

Comparing source boot environment <c0t0d0> file systems with the file

system(s) you specified for the new boot environment. Determining which

file systems should be in the new boot environment.

Updating boot environment description database on all BEs.

Updating system configuration files.

The device </dev/dsk/c1t0d0s0> is not a root device for any boot


Creating configuration for boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Source boot environment is <c0t0d0>.

Creating boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Creating file systems on boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Creating <zfs> file system for </> in zone <global> on

<rpool/ROOT/new-zfsBE>.

Populating file systems on boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Checking selection integrity.

Integrity check OK.

Populating contents of mount point </>.

Copying.

Creating shared file system mount points.

Creating compare databases for boot environment <zfsBE>.

Creating compare database for file system </>.

Making boot environment <zfsBE> bootable.

Creating boot_archive for /.alt.tmp.b-cBc.mnt

updating /.alt.tmp.b-cBc.mnt/platform/sun4u/boot_archive

Population of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

Creation of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------

c0t0d0 yes yes yes no -


# zfs list








You can now upgrade or activate the new boot environment.

In this example, the new boot environment is upgraded by using the luupgrade command froman image that is stored in the location indicated with the -s option.

# luupgrade -n zfsBE -u -s /net/install/export/s10/combined.s10

51135 blocks

miniroot filesystem is <lofs>

Mounting miniroot at

</net/install/export/solaris_10/combined.solaris_10_wos



/Solaris_10/Tools/Boot>

Validating the contents of the media

</net/install/export/s10/combined.s10>.


The media contains an operating system upgrade image.

The media contains Solaris version <10_1008>.

Constructing upgrade profile to use.

Locating the operating system upgrade program.

Checking for existence of previously scheduled Live

Upgrade requests.

Creating upgrade profile for BE <zfsBE>.

Determining packages to install or upgrade for BE <zfsBE>.

Performing the operating system upgrade of the BE <zfsBE>.

CAUTION: Interrupting this process may leave the boot environment

unstable or unbootable.

Upgrading Solaris: 100% completed

Installation of the packages from this media is complete.

Adding operating system patches to the BE <zfsBE>.

The operating system patch installation is complete.

INFORMATION: The file /var/sadm/system/logs/upgrade_log on boot

environment <zfsBE> contains a log of the upgrade operation.

INFORMATION: The file var/sadm/system/data/upgrade_cleanup on boot

environment <zfsBE> contains a log of cleanup operations required.

INFORMATION: Review the files listed above. Remember that all

of the files are located on boot environment <zfsBE>.

Before you activate boot environment <zfsBE>, determine if any

additional system maintenance is required or if additional media

of the software distribution must be installed.

The Solaris upgrade of the boot environment <zfsBE> is complete.

The new boot environment can be activated anytime after it is created.

# luactivate new-zfsBE

**********************************************************************

The target boot environment has been activated. It will be used when you

reboot. NOTE: You MUST NOT USE the reboot, halt, or uadmin commands. You

MUST USE either the init or the shutdown command when you reboot. If you

do not use either init or shutdown, the system will not boot using the

target BE.

**********************************************************************

In case of a failure while booting to the target BE, the following process

needs to be followed to fallback to the currently working boot environment:

1. Enter the PROM monitor (ok prompt).

2. Change the boot device back to the original boot environment by typing:

setenv boot-device /pci@1f,0/pci@1/scsi@4,1/disk@2,0:a

3. Boot to the original boot environment by typing:

boot

**********************************************************************



Modifying boot archive service

Activation of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

Reboot the system to the ZFS boot environment.

# init 6

# svc.startd: The system is coming down. Please wait.

svc.startd: 79 system services are now being stopped.

.

.

.

If you fall back to the UFS boot environment, then you need to import again any ZFS storagepools that were created in the ZFS boot environment because they are not automaticallyavailable in the UFS boot environment. You will see messages similar to the following examplewhen you switch back to the UFS boot environment.

# luactivate c0t0d0

WARNING: The following files have changed on both the current boot

environment <new-zfsBE> zone <global> and the boot environment

to be activated <c0t0d0>:

/etc/zfs/zpool.cache

INFORMATION: The files listed above are in conflict between the current

boot environment <zfsBE> zone <global> and the boot environment to be

activated <c0t0d0>. These files will not be automatically synchronized

from the current boot environment <new-zfsBE> when boot environment <c0t0d0>

Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root PoolIf you have an existing ZFS root pool and want to create a new ZFS boot environment withinthat pool, the following procedure provides the steps. After the inactive boot environment iscreated, the new boot environment can be upgraded and activated at your convenience. The -poption is not required when you create a boot environment within the same pool.

▼ How to Create a ZFS Boot Environment Within theSame ZFS Root Pool



1

Creating a Boot Environment Within the Same ZFS Root Pool






b. From the SunSolve web site, follow the instructions in Infodoc 206844 to remove and addSolaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages include existingsoftware, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages and installthe new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading to the targetrelease fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If youare using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a release previous to Solaris 10 8/07, you donot need to remove this package.

Note – The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If you areusing Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a previous release, you do not need to remove thispackage.


c. Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages. For instructions, see “Installing Solaris LiveUpgrade”on page 60.



■ From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.■ Change to the patch directory as in this example.









# patchadd -M path-to-patches patch_id patch_id

path-to-patches is the patch to the patch directory such as /var/tmp/lupatches.patch_id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.


■ Reboot the system if necessary. Certain patches require a reboot to be effective.x86 only: Rebooting the system is required or Solaris Live Upgrade fails.

# init 6


Create the new boot environment.# lucreate [-c zfsBE] -n new-zfsBE

-c zfsBE Assigns the name zfsBE to the current boot environment. This option is notrequired and is used only when the first boot environment is created. If yourun lucreate for the first time and you omit the -c option, the softwarecreates a default name for you.

-n new-zfsBE Assigns the name to the boot environment to be created. The name must beunique on the system.

The creation of the new boot environment is almost instantaneous. A snapshot is created ofeach dataset in the current ZFS root pool, and a clone is then created from each snapshot.Snapshots are very disk-space efficient, and this process uses minimal disk space. When theinactive boot environment has been created, you can use the luupgrade or luactivatecommand to upgrade or activate the new ZFS boot environment.

(Optional) Verify that the boot environment is complete.The lustatus command reports whether the boot environment creation is complete andbootable.# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------

zfsBE yes yes yes no -


2

3



(Optional) Verify the basic dataset information on the system.In this example, the ZFS root pool is named rpool, and the @ symbol indicates a snapshot. Thenew boot environment mount points are temporary until the luactivate command isexecuted. The /dump and /swap volumes are shared with the ZFS root pool and bootenvironments within the root pool.# zfs list






rpool/ROOT/new-zfsBE 85.5K 57.6G 551M /tmp/.alt.103197





The following commands create a new ZFS boot environment, new-zfsBE. The -p option is notrequired because the boot environment is being created within the same root pool.

# lucreate [-c zfsBE] -n new-zfsBE


Comparing source boot environment <zfsBE> file systems with the file




Creating configuration for boot environment new-zfsBE.

Source boot environment is zfsBE.

Creating boot environment new-zfsBE.

Cloning file systems from boot environment zfsBE to create

boot environment new-zfsBE.

Creating snapshot for <rpool> on <rpool> Creating clone for <rpool>.

Setting canmount=noauto for <rpool> in zone <global> on <rpool>.

Population of boot environment zfsBE successful on <rpool>.

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------



# zfs list






rpool/ROOT/new-zfsBE 85.5K 57.6G 551M /tmp/.alt.103197



4

Example 13–2



You can now upgrade and activate the new boot environment. For an example of upgrading aZFS boot environment, see Example 13–1. For more examples of using the luupgradecommand, see Chapter 5, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks).”

# luactivate new-zfsBE

**********************************************************************





target BE.

**********************************************************************







boot

**********************************************************************


Activation of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

Reboot the system to the ZFS boot environment.

# init 6



.

.

.

Creating a Boot Environment In a New Root PoolIf you have an existing ZFS root pool and want to create a new ZFS boot environment in a newroot pool, the following procedure provides the steps. After the inactive boot environment iscreated, the new boot environment can be upgraded and activated at your convenience. The -poption is required to note where to place the new boot environment. The existing ZFS root poolmust exist and be on a separate slice to be bootable and upgradeable.

Creating a Boot Environment In a New Root Pool


▼ How to Create a Boot Environment on a New ZFS RootPool






b. From the SunSolve web site, follow the instructions in Infodoc 206844 to remove and addSolaris Live Upgrade packages.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages include existingsoftware, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages and installthe new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading to the targetrelease fails. The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If youare using Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a release previous to Solaris 10 8/07, you donot need to remove this package.

Note – The SUMWlucfg package is new starting with the Solaris 10 8/07 release. If you areusing Solaris Live Upgrade packages from a previous release, you do not need to remove thispackage.


c. Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages. For instructions, see “Installing Solaris LiveUpgrade”on page 60.

1








■ From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.■ Change to the patch directory as in this example.



# patchadd -M path-to-patches patch_id patch_id

path-to-patches is the patch to the patch directory such as /var/tmp/lupatches.patch_id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.



# init 6

You now have the packages and patches necessary for a successful migration.

Create a ZFS root pool.The ZFS root pool must be on a single slice to be bootable and upgradeable.# zpool create rpool2 c0t1d0s5

rpool2 Names of the new ZFS root pool.

c0t1d0s5 Specifies to place rpool2 on the bootable slice, c0t1d0s5.


Create the new boot environment.# lucreate [-c zfsBE] -n new-zfsBE -p rpool2

-c zfsBE Assigns the name zfsBE to the current ZFS boot environment.

-n new-zfsBE Assigns the name to the boot environment to be created. The name must beunique on the system.

2

3







-p rpool2 Places the newly created ZFS root boot environment into the ZFS root pooldefined in rpool2.

The creation of the new ZFS boot environment might take a while. The file system data is beingcopied to the new ZFS root pool. When the inactive boot environment has been created, youcan use the luupgrade or luactivate command to upgrade or activate the new ZFS bootenvironment.




------------------------------------------------------------------------



(Optional) Verify the basic dataset information on the system.The following example displays the names of all datasets on the system. The mount point listedfor the new boot environment are temporary until the luactivate command is executed. Thenew boot environment shares the volumes, rpool2/dump and rpool2/swap, with the rpool2ZFS boot environment.# zfs list













Creating a Boot Environment on a New Root Pool

In this example, a new ZFS root pool, rpool, is created on a separate slice, c0t2s0s5. Thelucreate command creates a new ZFS boot environment, new-zfsBE. The -p option isrequired, because the boot environment is being created in a different root pool.

# zpool create rpool C0t1d0s5

# zfs list




4

5

Example 13–3







# lucreate -c rpool -n new-zfsBE -p rpool2


Current boot environment is named <rpool>.

Creating initial configuration for primary boot environment <rpool>.

The device </dev/dsk/c0t0d0> is not a root device for any

boot environment; cannot get BE ID.

PBE configuration successful: PBE name <rpool> PBE Boot

Device </dev/dsk/rpool>.

Comparing source boot environment <rpool> file systems with

the file system(s) you specified for the new boot environment.

Determining which file systems should be in the new boot environment.



The device </dev/dsk/c1t0d0s0> is not a root device for any


Creating configuration for boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Source boot environment is <rpool>.

Creating boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Creating file systems on boot environment <new-zfsBE>.

Creating <zfs> file system for </> in zone <global> on

<rpool2/ROOT/new-zfsBE>.

Populating file systems on boot environment <new-zfsBE>.


Integrity check OK.


Copying.




Making boot environment <new-zfsBE> bootable.



Population of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

Creation of boot environment <new-zfsBE> successful.

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------



# zfs list














Creating a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than theCurrently Running System

If you have an existing ZFS root pool or UFS boot environment that is not currently used as theactive boot environment, you can use the following example to create a new ZFS bootenvironment from this boot environment. After the new ZFS boot environment is created, thisnew boot environment can be upgraded and activated at your convenience.

If you are creating a boot environment from a source other than the currently running system,you must use the lucreate command with the -s option. The -s option works the same as for aUFS file system. The -s option provides the path to the alternate root (/) file system. Thisalternate root (/) file system is the source for the creation of the new ZFS root pool. Thealternate root can be either a UFS (/) root file system or a ZFS root pool. The copy processmight take time, depending on your system.

The following example shows how the -s option is used when creating a boot environment onanother ZFS root pool.

EXAMPLE 13–4 How to Create a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently RunningSystem

The following command creates a new ZFS root pool from an existing ZFS root pool. The -noption assigns the name to the boot environment to be created, new-zfsBE. The -s optionspecifies the boot environment, rpool3, to be used as the source of the copy instead of thecurrently running boot environment. The -p option specifies to place the new bootenvironment in rpool2.

# lucreate -n new-zfsBE -s rpool3 -p rpool2

# lustatus



------------------------------------------------------------------------


zfsBE2 yes no no yes -

zfsBE3 yes no no yes -


# zfs list









rpool3/ROOT/zfsBE3 5.38G 57.6G 551M /tmp/.new.luupdall.109859



prool 9.29G 57.6G 20K /.new.lulib.rs.109262

Creating a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently Running System


EXAMPLE 13–4 How to Create a Boot Environment From a Source Other Than the Currently RunningSystem (Continued)





You can now upgrade and activate the new boot environment.

Falling Back to a ZFS Boot EnvironmentIf a failure is detected after upgrading or if the application is not compatible with an upgradedcomponent, you can fall back to the original boot environment with the luactivate command.

When you have migrated to a ZFS root pool from a UFS boot environment and you then decideto fall back to the UFS boot environment, you again need to import any ZFS storage pools thatwere created in the ZFS boot environment. These ZFS storage pools are not automaticallyavailable in the UFS boot environment. You will see messages similar to the following examplewhen you switch back to the UFS boot environment.

# luactivate c0t0d0


environment <new-ZFSbe> zone <global> and the boot environment

to be activated <c0t0d0>: /etc/zfs/zpool.cache


boot environment <ZFSbe> zone <global> and the boot environment to be

activated <c0t0d0>. These files will not be automatically synchronized

from the current boot environment <new-ZFSbe> when boot

environment <c0t0d0>

For examples of falling back to the original boot environment, see Chapter 6, “Failure Recovery:Falling Back to the Original Boot Environment (Tasks).”



Resource Location






TABLE 13–1 Additional Resources (Continued)Resource Location





Solaris Live Upgrade For ZFS With Non-GlobalZones Installed

This chapter provides an overview and step-by-step procedures for migrating a UFS (/) root filesystem to a ZFS root pool.■ “Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System With Non-Global Zones Installed (Overview

and Planning)” on page 209■ “Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With Non-Global Zones Installed to ZFS Root

Pool (Tasks)” on page 210

Note – Migrating from a UFS root (/) file system to a ZFS root pool or creating ZFS bootenvironments with Solaris Live Upgrade is new in the Solaris 10 10/08 release. When youperform a Solaris Live Upgrade for a UFS file system, both the command-line parameters andoperation of Solaris Live Upgrade remain unchanged. To perform a Solaris Live Upgrade on asystem with UFS file systems, see Part I, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade,” of this book.

Creating a ZFS Boot Environment on a System WithNon-Global Zones Installed (Overview and Planning)

You can use Solaris Live Upgrade to migrate your UFS root (/) file system with non-globalzones installed on a ZFS root pool. All non-global zones that are associated with the file systemare also copied to the new boot environment. The following non-global zone migrationscenarios are supported:

Pre-Migration Root File System and Zone Combination Post-Migration Root File System and Zone Combination

UFS root file system with the non-global zone rootdirectory in the UFS file system

UFS root file system with the non-global zone rootdirectory in a ZFS root pool

ZFS root pool with the non-global zone root directoryin the ZFS root pool

14C H A P T E R 1 4

209

Pre-Migration Root File System and Zone Combination Post-Migration Root File System and Zone Combination

ZFS root pool with the non-global zone root directoryin a UFS file system

UFS root file system with a non-global zone root in aZFS root pool

ZFS root pool with the non-global zone root in a ZFSroot pool

UFS root file system with the non-global zone root inZFS root pool

ZFS root pool with a non-global zone root directory ina ZFS root pool

ZFS root pool with the non-global zone root directoryin the ZFS root pool

On a system with a UFS root (/) file system and non-global zones installed, the non-globalzones are migrated if the zone is in a non-shared file system as part of the UFS to ZFS migration.Or, the zone is cloned when you upgrade within the same ZFS pool. If a non-global zone existsin a shared UFS file system, to migrate to another ZFS root pool, you must first upgrade thenon-global zone, as in previous Solaris releases.

■ For more planning information when migrating to a ZFS root pool, see “SystemRequirements and Limitations When Using Solaris Live Upgrade” on page 187.

■ For more limitations on ZFS and non-global zones, see “Using ZFS on a Solaris System WithZones Installed” in Oracle Solaris ZFS Administration Guide.

Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With Non-GlobalZones Installed to ZFS Root Pool (Tasks)

This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for migrating from a UFS root (/) file system toa ZFS root pool on a system with non-global zones installed. No non-global zones are on ashared file system in the UFS file system.

▼ How to Migrate a UFS File System to a ZFS Root Pool ona System With Non-Global ZonesThe lucreate command creates a boot environment of a ZFS root pool from a UFS root (/) filesystem. A ZFS root pool must exist before the lucreate operation and must be created withslices rather than whole disks to be upgradeable and bootable. This procedure shows how anexisting non-global zone associated with the UFS root (/) file system is copied to the new bootenvironment in a ZFS root pool.

In the following example, the existing non-global zone, myzone, has its non-global zone root in aUFS root (/) file system. The zone zzone has its zone root in a ZFS file system in the existing ZFSstorage pool, pool. Solaris Live Upgrade is used to migrate the UFS boot environment,

Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With Non-Global Zones Installed to ZFS Root Pool (Tasks)


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=gayov

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=819-5461&id=gayov

c2t2d0s0, to a ZFS boot environment, zfs2BE. The UFS-based myzone zone migrates to a newZFS storage pool, mpool, that is created before the Solaris Live Upgrade operation. TheZFS-based non-global zone, zzone, is cloned but retained in the ZFS pool pool and migrated tothe new zfs2BE boot environment.

Complete the following steps the first time you perform a Solaris Live Upgrade.


a. Remove existing Solaris Live Upgrade packages on your system if necessary. If you areupgrading to a new release, you must install the packages from that release.The three Solaris Live Upgrade packages, SUNWluu, SUNWlur, and SUNWlucfg, comprise thesoftware needed to upgrade by using Solaris Live Upgrade. These packages include existingsoftware, new features, and bug fixes. If you do not remove the existing packages and installthe new packages on your system before using Solaris Live Upgrade, upgrading to the targetrelease fails.# pkgrm SUNWlucfg SUNWluu SUNWlur

b. Install the new Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release to which you are upgrading.For instructions, see “Installing Solaris Live Upgrade”on page 60.

c. Before installing or running Solaris Live Upgrade, you are required to install the followingpatches. These patches ensure that you have all the latest bug fixes and new features in therelease.Ensure that you have the most recently updated patch list by consulting SunSolve. Search forthe Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

■ Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.

Note – Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more informationabout roles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide:Security Services.


■ From the SunSolve web site, obtain the list of patches.■ Change to the patch directory.



1


Chapter 14 • Solaris Live Upgrade For ZFS With Non-Global Zones Installed 211





# patchadd patch_id

patch_id is the patch number or numbers. Separate multiple patch names with a space.



# init 6

Create a ZFS root pool.The ZFS root pool must be on a single slice to be bootable and upgradeable.# zpool create rpool c3t0d0s0

In this example, the name of the new ZFS to be created is rpool. The pool is created on abootable slice, c3t0d0s0.


Migrate your USF root (/) file system to the new ZFS root pool.# lucreate [-c ufsBE] -n new-zfsBE -p rpool

-c ufsBE Assigns the name ufsBE to the current UFS boot environment. This option isnot required and is used only when the first boot environment is created. Ifyou run the lucreate command for the first time and you omit the -c option,the software creates a default name for you.

-n new-zfsBE Assigns the name new-zfsBE to the boot environment to be created. The namemust be unique on the system.

-p rpool Places the newly created ZFS root (/) file system into the ZFS root pooldefined in rpool.

All nonshared non-global zones are copied to the new boot environment along with critical filesystems. The creation of the new ZFS boot environment might take a while. The UFS file systemdata is being copied to the ZFS root pool. When the inactive boot environment has beencreated, you can use the luupgrade or luactivate command to upgrade or activate the newZFS boot environment.



2

3

4






------------------------------------------------------------------------

ufsBE yes yes yes no -


(Optional) Verify the basic dataset information on the system.The list command displays the names of all datasets on the system. In this example, rpool isthe name of the ZFS pool and new-zfsBE is the name of the newly created ZFS bootenvironment.# zfs list







The mount points listed for the new boot environment are temporary until the luactivatecommand is executed. The /dump and /swap volumes are not shared with the original UFS bootenvironment, but are shared within the ZFS root pool and boot environments within the rootpool.

Migrating From a UFS root (/) File System With Non-Global Zones Installed to ZFSRoot Pool

In the following example, the existing non-global zone myzone, has its non-global zone root in aUFS root (/) file system. The zone zzone has its zone root in a ZFS file system in the existing ZFSstorage pool, pool. Solaris Live Upgrade is used to migrate the UFS boot environment,c2t2d0s0, to a ZFS boot environment, zfs2BE. The UFS-based myzone zone migrates to a newZFS storage pool, mpool, that is created before the Solaris Live Upgrade operation. TheZFS-based, non-global zone, zzone, is cloned but retained in the ZFS pool pool and migrated tothe new zfs2BE boot environment.

# zoneadm list -iv

ID NAME STATUS PATH BRAND IP

0 global running / native shared

- myzone installed /zones/myzone native shared

- zzone installed /pool/zones native shared

# zpool create mpool mirror c3t0d0s0 c4td0s0

# lucreate -c c1t2d0s0 -n zfs2BE -p mpool


No name for current boot environment.

Current boot environment is named <c1t2d0s0>.

Creating initial configuration for primary boot environment <c1t2d0s0>.

The device </dev/dsk/c1t2d0s0> is not a root device for any


PBE configuration successful: PBE name <c1t2d0s0> PBE Boot Device

</dev/dsk/c1t2d0s0>.

Comparing source boot environment <c1t2d0s0> file systems with the file

5

Example 14–1







The device </dev/dsk/c1t0d0s0> is not a root device for any boot


Creating configuration for boot environment <zfsBE>.

Source boot environment is <c1t2d0s0>.

Creating boot environment <zfsBE>.

Creating file systems on boot environment <zfsBE>.

Creating <zfs> file system for </> in zone <global> on <rpool/ROOT/zfsBE>.

Populating file systems on boot environment <zfsBE>.


Integrity check OK.


Copying.




Making boot environment <zfsBE> bootable.



Population of boot environment <zfsBE> successful.

Creation of boot environment <zfsBE> successful.

When the lucreate operation completes, use the lustatus command to view the bootenvironment status as in this example.

# lustatus

Boot Environment Is Active Active Can Copy

Name Complete Now On Reboot Delete Status

-------------------------- -------- ------ --------- ------ ----------


zfsBE yes no no yes -

# zoneadm list -iv

ID NAME STATUS PATH BRAND IP

0 global running / native shared

- myzone installed /zones/myzone native shared

- zzone installed /pool/zones native shared

Next, use the luactivate command to activate the new ZFS boot environment. For example:

# luactivate zfsBE

**********************************************************************





target BE.

**********************************************************************









boot

**********************************************************************


Activation of boot environment <ZFSbe> successful.

Reboot the system to the ZFS BE.

# init 6



.

.

.

Confirm the new boot environment and the status of the migrated zones as in this example.

# lustatus

Boot Environment Is Active Active Can Copy

Name Complete Now On Reboot Delete Status

-------------------------- -------- ------ --------- ------ ----------


zfsBE yes no no yes -

If you fall back to the UFS boot environment, then you again need to import any ZFS storagepools that were created in the ZFS boot environment because they are not automaticallyavailable in the UFS boot environment. You will see messages similar to the following when youswitch back to the UFS boot environment.

# luactivate c1t2d0s0


environment <ZFSbe> zone <global> and the boot environment to be activated <c1t2d0s0>:

/etc/zfs/zpool.cache


boot environment <ZFSbe> zone <global> and the boot environment to be

activated <c1t2d0s0>. These files will not be automatically synchronized

from the current boot environment <ZFSbe> when boot environment <c1t2d0s0>





Resource Location

For information about non-global zones, includingoverview, planning, and step-by-step instructions

System Administration Guide: Oracle SolarisContainers-Resource Management and Oracle SolarisZones



For information about using Solaris Live Upgrade ona system with UFS file systems

Part I, “Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade,” of thisbook, including Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Solaris OSon a System With Non-Global Zones Installed”







AppendicesThis part provides reference information.

P A R T I I I

217

218

Troubleshooting (Tasks)

This chapter contains a list of specific error messages and general problems you mightencounter when installing Solaris 10 9/10 software. The chapter also explains how to fix theproblems. Start by using this list of sections to determine where in the installation process theproblem occurred.

■ “Problems With Setting Up Network Installations” on page 219■ “Problems With Booting a System” on page 220■ “Initial Installation of the Solaris OS” on page 226■ “Upgrading the Solaris OS” on page 228

Note – When you see the phrase “bootable media,” this means the Solaris installation programand JumpStart installation method.

Problems With Setting Up Network InstallationsUnknown client “host_name”

Cause: The host_name argument in the add_install_client command is not a host in thenaming service.

Solution: Add the host host_name to the naming service and execute theadd_install_client command again.

Error: <system name> does not exist in the NIS ethers map

Add it, and rerun the add_install_client command

Description: When you run the add_install_client command, the command fails with theabove error.

Cause: The client you are adding to the install server does not exist in the server's/etc/ethers file.

AA P P E N D I X A

219

Solution: Add the needed information to the /etc/ethers file on the install server and runthe add_install_client command again.


Note – Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more informationabout roles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide:Security Services.

2. On the client, find the ethers address.

# ifconfig -a grep ethers

ether 8:0:20:b3:39:1d

3. On the install server, open the /etc/ethers file in an editor. Add the address to the list.4. On the client, run add_install_client again as in this example.

# ./add_install_client bluegill sun4u

Problems With Booting a System

Booting From Media, Error Messages

le0: No carrier - transceiver cable problem

Cause: The system is not connected to the network.

Solution: If this is a nonnetworked system, ignore this message. If this is a networked system,ensure that the Ethernet cabling is attached securely.

The file just loaded does not appear to be executable

Cause: The system cannot find the proper media for booting.

Solution: Verify that the system has been set up properly to install the Solaris 10 9/10 softwarefrom the network from an install server. The following are examples of checks you canmake.

■ If you copied the images of the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris SoftwareCDs to the install server, ensure that you specified the correct platform group for thesystem when you set it up.

■ If you are using DVD or CD media, ensure that the Solaris Operating System DVD orSolaris Software - 1 CD is mounted and accessible on the install server.





boot: cannot open <filename> (SPARC based systems only)

Cause: This error occurs when you override the location of the boot -file by explicitlysetting it.

Note – filename is a variable for the name of the file affected.

Solution: Follow these instructions:

■ Reset the boot -file in the PROM to “ “ (blank).■ Ensure that the diag-switch is set to off and to true.

Can’t boot from file/device

Cause: The installation media cannot find the bootable media.

Solution: Ensure that the following conditions are met:

■ The DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive is installed properly and turned on.■ Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD is inserted into the drive.■ The disc is free of damage or dirt.

WARNING: clock gained xxx days -- CHECK AND RESET DATE! (SPARC based systems

only)

Description: This is an informational message.

Solution: Ignore the message and continue with the installation.

Not a UFS file system (x86 based systems only)

Cause: When Solaris 10 9/10 software was installed (either through the Solaris installationprogram or custom JumpStart), no boot disk was selected. You now must edit the BIOS toboot the system.

Solution: Select the BIOS to boot. See your BIOS documentation for instructions.

Booting From Media, General Problems

The system does not boot.

Description: When initially setting up a custom JumpStart server, you might encounter bootproblems that do not return an error message. To verify information about the system andhow the system is booting, run the boot command with the -v option. When you use the -voption, the boot command displays verbose debugging information about the screen.


Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 221

Note – If this flag is not given, the messages are still printed, but the output is directed to thesystem log file. For more information, see syslogd(1M).

Solution: For SPARC based systems, at the ok prompt, type the following command.

ok boot net -v - install

Boot from DVD media fails on systems with Toshiba SD-M 1401 DVD-ROM

Description: If your system has a Toshiba SD-M1401 DVD-ROM with firmware revision1007, the system cannot boot from the Solaris Operating System DVD.

Solution: Apply patch 111649–03, or later version, to update the Toshiba SD-M1401DVD-ROM drive's firmware. The patch 111649–03 is available at sunsolve.sun.com.

The system hangs or panics when nonmemory PC cards are inserted. (x86 based

systems only)

Cause: Nonmemory PC cards cannot use the same memory resources that are used by otherdevices.

Solution: To correct this problem, see the instructions for your PC card and check for theaddress range.

The system hangs before displaying the system prompt. (x86 based systems only)

Solution: You have hardware that is not supported. Check your hardware manufacturer'sdocumentation.

Booting From the Network, Error MessagesWARNING: getfile: RPC failed: error 5 (RPC Timed out).

Description: This error occurs when you have two or more servers on a network respondingto an install client's boot request. The install client connects to the wrong boot server, andthe installation hangs. The following specific reasons might cause this error to occur:

Cause: Reason 1:/etc/bootparams files might exist on different servers with an entry for thisinstall client.

Solution: Reason 1: Ensure that servers on the network do not have multiple/etc/bootparams entries for the install client. If they do have multiple entries, removeduplicate client entries in the /etc/bootparams file on all install servers and boot serversexcept the one you want the install client to use.

Cause: Reason 2: Multiple /tftpboot or /rplboot directory entries might exist for this installclient.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=syslogd-1m


Solution: Reason 2: Ensure that servers on the network do not have multiple /tftpboot or/rplboot directory entries for the install client. If they do have multiple entries, removeduplicate client entries from the /tftpboot or /rplboot directories on all install servers andboot servers except the one you want the install client to use.

Cause: Reason 3: An install client entry might exist in the /etc/bootparams file on a serverand an entry in another /etc/bootparams file that enables all systems to access the profileserver. Such an entry resembles the following:

* install_config=profile_server:path

A line that resembles the previous entry in the NIS or NIS+ bootparams table can also causethis error.

Solution: Reason 3: If a wildcard entry is in the naming service bootparams map or table (forexample, * install_config=), delete it and add it to the /etc/bootparams file on the bootserver.

No network boot server. Unable to install the system. See installation

instructions. (SPARC based systems only)

Cause: This error occurs on a system that you are attempting to install from the network. Thesystem is not set up correctly.

Solution: Ensure that you correctly set up the system to install from the network. See “AddingSystems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.

prom_panic: Could not mount file system (SPARC based systems only)

Cause: This error occurs when you are installing Solaris from a network, but the bootsoftware cannot locate the following:

■ Solaris Operating System DVD, either the DVD or a copy of the DVD image on theinstall server

■ Solaris Software - 1 CD image, either the Solaris Software - 1 CD or a copy of the CDimage on the install server

Solution: Ensure that the installation software is mounted and shared.

■ If you are installing Solaris from the install server's DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive,ensure that the Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software - 1 CD is inserted inthe CD-ROM drive, is mounted, and is shared in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file.

■ If installing from a copy of the Solaris Operating System DVD image or Solaris Software- 1 CD image on the install server's disk, ensure that the directory path to the copy isshared in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1909&id=netinstall-40778



Timeout waiting for ARP/RARP packet...(SPARC based systems only)

Cause: Reason 1: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a systemthat knows about the client.

Solution: Reason 1: Verify the system's host name is in the NIS or NIS+ naming service. Also,verify the bootparams search order in the boot server's /etc/nsswitch.conf file.

For example, the following line in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file indicates that JumpStart orthe Solaris installation program first looks in the NIS maps for bootparams information. Ifthe program does not find any information, the installer looks in the boot server's/etc/bootparams file.

bootparams: nis files

Cause: Reason 2: The client's Ethernet address is not correct.

Solution: Reason 2: Verify that the client's Ethernet address in the install server's/etc/ethers file is correct.

Cause: Reason 3: In a custom JumpStart installation, the add_install_client commandspecifies the platform group that uses a specified server as an install server. If the wrongarchitecture value is used when using the add_install_client, this problem occurs. Forexample, the machine you want to install is a sun4u, but you used i86pc instead.

Solution: Reason 3: Rerun add_install_client with the correct architecture value.

ip: joining multicasts failed on tr0 - will use link layer broadcasts for

multicast (x86 based systems only)

Cause: This error message is displayed when you boot a system with a token ring card.Ethernet multicast and token ring multicast do not work the same way. The driver returnsthis error message because an invalid multicast address was provided to it.

Solution: Ignore this error message. If multicast does not work, IP uses layer broadcastsinstead and does not cause the installation to fail.

Requesting Internet address for Ethernet_Address (x86 based systems only)

Cause: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a system that knowsabout the client.

Solution: Verify the system's host name is listed in the naming service. If the system's hostname is listed in the NIS or NIS+ naming service, and the system continues to print thiserror message, try rebooting.

RPC: Timed out No bootparams (whoami) server responding; still trying... (x86

based systems only)

Cause: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a system with an entryin the /etc/bootparams file on the install server.



Solution: Use add_install_client on the install server. Using this command adds theproper entry in the /etc/bootparams file, enabling the client to boot from the network.

Still trying to find a RPL server... (x86 based systems only)

Cause: The system is trying to boot from the network, but the server is not set up to boot thissystem.

Solution: On the install server, execute add_install_client for the system to be installed.The add_install_client command sets up an /rplboot directory, which contains thenecessary network boot program.

CLIENT MAC ADDR: FF FF FF FF FF FF (network installations with DHCP only)

Cause: The DHCP server is not configured correctly. This error might occur if the options ormacros are not correctly defined in the DHCP Manager software.

Solution: In the DHCP Manager software, verify that the options and macros are correctlydefined. Confirm that the Router option is defined, and that the value of the Router option iscorrect for the subnet you are using for the network installation.

Booting From the Network, General Problems

The system boots from the network, but from a system other than the specified

install server.

Cause: An /etc/bootparams and perhaps an /etc/ethers entry exist on another system forthe client.

Solution: On the name server, update the /etc/bootparams entry for the system that is beinginstalled. The entry should conform to the following syntax:

install_system root=boot_server:path install=install_server:path

Also, ensure that only one bootparams entry is on the subnet for the install client.

The system does not boot from the network (network installations with DHCP only).

Cause: The DHCP server is not configured correctly. This error might occur if the system isnot configured as an installation client on the DHCP server.

Solution: In the DHCP manager software, verify that installation options and macros aredefined for the client system. For more information, see “Preconfiguring SystemConfiguration Information With the DHCP Service (Tasks)” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1909&id=dhcp-admin-38



Initial Installation of the Solaris OSInitial installation fails

Solution: If the Solaris installation fails, you must restart the installation. To restart theinstallation, boot the system from the Solaris Operating System DVD, the Solaris Software -1 CD, or from the network.

You cannot uninstall the Solaris software after the software has been partially installed. Youmust restore your system from a backup or begin the Solaris installation process again.

/cdrom/cdrom0/SUNWxxxx/reloc.cpio: Broken pipe

Description: This error message is informational and does not affect the installation. Thecondition occurs when a write on a pipe does not have a reading process.

Solution: Ignore the message and continue with the installation.

WARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE (x86 based systems only)

Cause: This is an informational message. The default boot device set in the system's BIOSmight be set to a device that requires you to use the Solaris Device Configuration Assistantto boot the system.

Solution: Continue with the installation and, if necessary, change the system's default bootdevice specified in the BIOS after you install the Solaris software to a device that does notrequire the Solaris Device Configuration Assistant.

x86 only – If you are using the locale keyword to test a custom JumpStart profile for an initialinstallation, the pfinstall -D command fails to test the profile. For a workaround, see the errormessage “could not select locale,” in the section, “Upgrading the Solaris OS” on page 228.

▼ x86: To Check IDE Disk for Bad BlocksIDE disk drives do not automatically map out bad blocks like other drives supported by Solarissoftware. Before installing Solaris on an IDE disk, you might want to perform a surface analysison the disk. To perform surface analysis on an IDE disk, follow this procedure.


Boot to the installation media.

When you are prompted to select an installation type, select option 6, Single user shell.

1

2

3

Initial Installation of the Solaris OS



Start the format(1M) program.# format

Specify the IDE disk drive on which you want to perform a surface analysis.# cxdy

cx Is the controller number

dy Is the device number

Determine if you have an fdiskpartition.

■ If a Solaris fdisk partition already exists, proceed to Step 7.■ If a Solaris fdisk partition does not exist, use the fdisk command to create a Solaris

partition on the disk.

format> fdisk

To begin the surface analysis, type:format> analyze

Determine the current settings, type:analyze> config

(Optional) To change settings, type:analyze> setup

To find bad blocks, type:analyze> type_of_surface_analysis

type_of_surface_analysis Is read, write, or compare

If format finds bad blocks, it remaps them.

To exit the analysis, type:analyze> quit

Determine if you want to specify blocks to remap.

■ If no, go to Step 13.■ If yes, type:

format> repair

To exit the format program, type:quit

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Initial Installation of the Solaris OS


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=format-1m

Restart the media in multiuser mode by typing the following command.# exit

Upgrading the Solaris OS

Upgrading, Error Messages

No upgradable disks

Cause: A swap entry in the /etc/vfstab file is causing the upgrade to fail.

Solution: Comment out the following lines in the /etc/vfstab file:

■ All swap files and slices on disks not being upgraded■ Swap files that are no longer present■ Any unused swap slices

usr/bin/bzcat not found

Cause: Solaris Live Upgrade fails because of needing a patch cluster.

Solution: A patch is needed to install Solaris Live Upgrade. Ensure that you have the mostrecently updated patch list by consulting http://sunsolve.sun.com. Search for the Infodoc206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

Upgradeable Solaris root devices were found, however, no suitable partitions to

hold the Solaris install software were found. Upgrading using the Solaris

Installer is not possible. It might be possible to upgrade using the Solaris

Software 1 CDROM. (x86 based systems only)

Cause: You cannot upgrade with the Solaris Software - 1 CD because you do not have enoughspace.

Solution: To upgrade, you can either create a swap slice that is larger than or equal to 512Mbytes or use another method of upgrading such as the Solaris installation from SolarisOperating System DVD, a net installation image, or JumpStart.

ERROR: Could not select locale (x86 based systems only)

Cause: When you test your JumpStart profile by using the pfinstall -D command, the dryrun test fails under the following conditions:

■ The profile contains the locale keyword.

14




■ You're testing a release that contains GRUB software. Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06release, the GRUB boot loader facilitates booting different operating systems installedon your system with the GRUB menu.

With the introduction of GRUB software, the miniroot is compressed. The software can nolonger find the list of locales from the compressed miniroot. The miniroot is the smallestpossible Solaris root (/) file system and is found on the Solaris installation media.

Solution: Perform the following steps. Use the following values.

■ MEDIA_DIR is /cdrom/cdrom0/■ MINIROOT_DIR is $MEDIA_DIR/Solaris_10/Tools/Boot■ MINIROOT_ARCHIVE is $MEDIA_DIR/boot/x86.miniroot■ TEMP_FILE_NAME is /tmp/test

1. Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information aboutroles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide: SecurityServices.

2. Uncompress the miniroot archive.

# /usr/bin/gzcat $MINIROOT_ARCHIVE > $TEMP_FILE_NAME

3. Create the miniroot device by using the lofiadm command.

# LOFI_DEVICE=/usr/sbin/lofiadm -a $TEMP_FILE_NAME

# echo $LOFI_DEVICE

/dev/lofi/1

4. Mount the miniroot with the lofi command under the Miniroot directory.

# /usr/sbin/mount -F ufs $LOFI_DEVICE $MINIROOT_DIR

5. Test the profile.

# /usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -D -c $MEDIA_DIR $path-to-jumpstart_profile

6. After the testing is completed, unmount the lofi device.

# umount $LOFI_DEVICE

7. Delete the lofi device.

# lofiadm -d $TEMP_FILE_NAME

Upgrading, General Problems

The upgrade option is not presented even though there is a version of Solaris

software that’s upgradable on the system.

Cause: Reason 1: The /var/sadm directory is a symlink or it is mounted from another filesystem.





Solution: Reason 1: Move the /var/sadm directory into the root (/) or /var file system.

Cause: Reason 2: The /var/sadm/softinfo/INST_RELEASE file is missing.

Solution: Reason 2: Create a new INST_RELEASE file by using the following template:

OS=Solaris

VERSION=xREV=0

x Is the version of Solaris software on the system

Cause: Reason 3: SUNWusr is missing from /var/sadm/softinfo.

Solution: Solution 3: You need to do an initial installation. The Solaris software is notupgradable.

Couldn’t shut down or initialize the md driver

Solution: Follow these instructions:

■ If the file system is not a RAID-1 volume, comment out in the vsftab file.■ If the file system is a RAID-1 volume, break the mirror and reinstall. For information

about unmirroring, see “Removing RAID-1 Volumes (Unmirroring)” in Solaris VolumeManager Administration Guide.

The upgrade fails because the Solaris installation program cannot mount a file

system.

Cause: During an upgrade, the script attempts to mount all the file systems that are listed inthe system's /etc/vfstab file on the root (/) file system that is being upgraded. If theinstallation script cannot mount a file system, it fails and exits.

Solution: Ensure that all file systems in the system's /etc/vfstab file can be mounted.Comment out any file systems in the /etc/vfstab file that cannot be mounted or that mightcause the problem so that the Solaris installation program does not try to mount themduring the upgrade. Any system-based file systems that contain software to be upgraded (forexample, /usr) cannot be commented out.

The upgrade fails

Description: The system does not have enough space for the upgrade.

Cause: Check “Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade for the space problem and see ifyou can fix it without using auto-layout to reallocate space.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=tasks-mirrors-26

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=tasks-mirrors-26

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimx

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1907&id=esimx

Problems upgrading RAID–1 volume root (/) file systems

Solution: If you have problems upgrading when using Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1volumes that are the root (/) file system, see Chapter 25, “Troubleshooting Solaris VolumeManager (Tasks),” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

▼ To Continue Upgrading After a Failed UpgradeThe upgrade fails and the system cannot be soft-booted. The failure is for reasons beyond yourcontrol, such as a power failure or a network connection failure.

Reboot the system from the Solaris Operating System DVD, the Solaris Software - 1 CD, or fromthe network.

Choose the upgrade option for installation.The Solaris installation program determines if the system has been partially upgraded andcontinues the upgrade.

x86: Problems With Solaris Live Upgrade When YouUse GRUBThe following errors can occur when you use Solaris Live Upgrade and the GRUB boot loaderon an x86 based system.

ERROR: The media product tools installation directory path-to-installation-directorydoes not exist.

ERROR: The media dirctory does not contain an operating system upgrade image.

Description: The error messages are seen when using the luupgrade command to upgrade anew boot environment.

Cause: An older version of Solaris Live Upgrade is being used. The Solaris Live Upgradepackages you have installed on your system are incompatible with the media and the releaseon that media.

Solution: Always use the Solaris Live Upgrade packages from the release you are upgradingto.

Example: In the following example, the error message indicates that the Solaris Live Upgradepackages on the system are not the same version as on the media.

# luupgrade -u -n s10u1 -s /mnt

Validating the contents of the media </mnt>.


1

2



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=troubleshoottasks-33506

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-4520&id=troubleshoottasks-33506

ERROR: The media product tools installation directory

</mnt/Solaris_10/Tools/Boot/usr/sbin/install.d/install_config> does

not exist.

ERROR: The media </mnt> does not contain an operating system upgrade

image.

ERROR: Cannot find or is not executable: </sbin/biosdev>.

ERROR: One or more patches required by Solaris Live Upgrade has not been

installed.

Cause: One or more patches required by Solaris Live Upgrade are not installed on yoursystem. Beware that this error message does not catch all missing patches.

Solution: Before using Solaris Live Upgrade, always install all the required patches. Ensurethat you have the most recently updated patch list by consulting http://sunsolve.sun.com.Search for the Infodoc 206844 (formerly 72099) on the SunSolve web site.

ERROR: Device mapping command </sbin/biosdev> failed. Please reboot and try

again.

Cause: Reason 1: Solaris Live Upgrade is unable to map devices because of previousadministrative tasks.

Solution: Reason 1: Reboot the system and try Solaris Live Upgrade again

Cause: Reason 2: If you reboot your system and get the same error message, you have two ormore identical disks. The device mapping command is unable to distinguish between them.

Solution: Reason 2: Create a new dummy fdisk partition on one of the disks. See thefdisk(1M) man page. Then reboot the system.

Cannot delete the boot environment that contains the GRUB menu

Cause: Solaris Live Upgrade imposes the restriction that a boot environment cannot bedeleted if the boot environment contains the GRUB menu.

Solution: Use lumake(1M) or luupgrade(1M) commands to reuse that boot environment.

The file system containing the GRUB menu was accidentally remade. However, the

disk has the same slices as before. For example, the disk was not re-sliced.

Cause: The file system that contains the GRUB menu is critical to keeping the systembootable. Solaris Live Upgrade commands do not destroy the GRUB menu. But, if youaccidentally remake or otherwise destroy the file system containing the GRUB menu with acommand other than a Solaris Live Upgrade command, the recovery software attempts toreinstall the GRUB menu. The recovery software puts the GRUB menu back in the same filesystem at the next reboot. For example, you might have used the newfs or mkfs commandson the file system and accidentally destroyed the GRUB menu. To restore the GRUB menucorrectly, the slice must adhere to the following conditions:




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=fdisk-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=lumake-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=luupgrade-1m

■ Contain a mountable file system■ Remain a part of the same Solaris Live Upgrade boot environment where the slice

resided previously

Before rebooting the system, make any necessary corrective actions on the slice.

Solution: Reboot the system. A backup copy of the GRUB menu is automatically installed.

The GRUB menu’s menu.lst file was accidentally deleted.

Solution: Reboot the system. A backup copy of the GRUB menu is automatically installed.

▼ System Panics When Upgrading With Solaris LiveUpgrade Running Veritas VxVmWhen you use Solaris Live Upgrade while upgrading and running Veritas VxVM, the systempanics on reboot unless you upgrade by using the following procedure. The problem occurs ifpackages do not conform to Solaris advanced packaging guidelines.


Create an inactive boot environment. See “Creating a New Boot Environment”on page 64.

Before upgrading the inactive boot environment, you must disable the existing Veritas softwareon the inactive boot environment.

a. Mount the inactive boot environment.# lumount inactive_boot_environment_name mount_point

For example:

# lumount solaris8 /mnt

b. Change to the directory that contains the vfstab, for example:# cd /mnt/etc

c. Make a copy of the inactive boot environment's vfstabfile, for example:# cp vfstab vfstab.501

d. In the copied vfstab, comment out all Veritas file system entries, for example:# sed ’/vx\/dsk/s/^/#/g’ < vfstab > vfstab.novxfs

1

2

3




The first character of each line is changed to #, which makes the line a comment line. Notethat this comment line is different than the system file-comment lines.

e. Copy the changed vfstabfile, for example:# cp vfstab.novxfs vfstab

f. Change directories to the inactive boot environment's system file, for example:# cd /mnt/etc

g. Make a copy of the inactive boot environment's system file, for example:# cp system system.501

h. Comment out all“forceload:”entries that include drv/vx.# sed ’/forceload: drv\/vx/s/^/*/’ <system> system.novxfs

The first character of each line is changed to *, which makes the line a command line. Notethat this comment line is different than the vfstab file comment lines.

i. Create the Veritas install-dbfile, for example:# touch vx/reconfig.d/state.d/install-db

j. Unmount the inactive boot environment.# luumount inactive_boot_environment_name

Upgrade the inactive boot environment. See Chapter 5,“Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade(Tasks).”

Activate the inactive boot environment. See “Activating a Boot Environment”on page 110.

Shut down the system.# init 0

Boot the inactive boot environment in single-user mode:OK boot -s

Several messages and error messages that contain “vxvm” or “VXVM” are displayed that can beignored. The inactive boot environment becomes active.

Upgrade Veritas.

a. Remove the Veritas VRTSvmsa package from the system, for example:# pkgrm VRTSvmsa

4

5

6

7

8



b. Change directories to the Veritas packages.# cd /location_of_Veritas_software

c. Add the latest Veritas packages to the system:# pkgadd -d ‘pwd‘ VRTSvxvm VRTSvmsa VRTSvmdoc VRTSvmman VRTSvmdev

Restore the original vfstab and system files:# cp /etc/vfstab.original /etc/vfstab

# cp /etc/system.original /etc/system


x86: Service Partition Not Created by Default onSystems With No Existing Service PartitionIf you install the Solaris 10 9/10 OS on a system that does not currently include a service ordiagnostic partition, the installation program might not create a service partition by default. Ifyou want to include a service partition on the same disk as the Solaris partition, you mustre-create the service partition before you install the Solaris 10 9/10 OS.

If you installed the Solaris 8 2/02 OS on a system with a service partition, the installationprogram might not have preserved the service partition. If you did not manually edit the fdiskboot partition layout to preserve the service partition, the installation program deleted theservice partition during the installation.

Note – If you did not specifically preserve the service partition when you installed the Solaris 82/02 OS, you might not be able to re-create the service partition and upgrade to the Solaris 109/10 OS.

If you want to include a service partition on the disk that contains the Solaris partition, chooseone of the following workarounds.

▼ To Install Software From a Network Installation Imageor From the Solaris Operating System DVDTo install the software from a net installation image or from the Solaris Operating System DVDover the network, follow these steps.

9

10



Delete the contents of the disk.

Before you install, create the service partition by using the diagnostics CD for your system.For information about how to create the service partition, see your hardware documentation.

Boot the system from the network.The Customize fdisk Partitions screen is displayed.

To load the default boot disk partition layout, click Default.The installation program preserves the service partition and creates the Solaris partition.

▼ To Install From the Solaris Software - 1 CD or From aNetwork Installation ImageTo use the Solaris installation program to install from the Solaris Software - 1 CD or from anetwork installation image on a boot server, follow these steps.

Delete the contents of the disk.

Before you install, create the service partition by using the diagnostics CD for your system.For information about how to create the service partition, see your hardware documentation.

The installation program prompts you to choose a method for creating the Solaris partition.

Boot the system.

Select the Use rest of disk for Solaris partition option.The installation program preserves the service partition and creates the Solaris partition.

Complete the installation.

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6



Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements(Reference)

This appendix is for system administrators who install or remove packages, especiallythird-party packages. Following these packaging requirements enables the following:

■ Avoids modifying the currently running system so you can upgrade with Solaris LiveUpgrade and create and maintain non-global zones and diskless clients

■ Prevents a package from being interactive to automate installations when using installationprograms such as custom JumpStart


■ “Preventing Modification of the Current OS” on page 237.■ “Preventing User Interaction When Installing or Upgrading” on page 241.■ “Setting Package Parameters For Zones” on page 242

Preventing Modification of the Current OSFollowing the requirements in this section keeps the currently running OS unaltered.

Using Absolute PathsFor an installation of an operating system to be successful, packages must recognize andcorrectly respect alternate root (/) file systems, such as a Solaris Live Upgrade inactive bootenvironment.

Packages can include absolute paths in their pkgmap file (package map). If these files exist, theyare written relative to the -R option of the pkgadd command. Packages that contain bothabsolute and relative (relocatable) paths can be installed to an alternative root (/) file system aswell. $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT is prepended to both absolute and relocatable files so all paths areresolved properly when being installed by pkgadd.

BA P P E N D I X B

237

Using the pkgadd -RCommandPackages being installed by using the pkgadd -R option or being removed using the pkgrm -Roption must not alter the currently running system. This feature is used by custom JumpStart,Solaris Live Upgrade, non-global zones and diskless client.

Any procedure scripts that are included in the packages being installed with the pkgaddcommand -R option or being removed by using the pkgrm command -R option must not alterthe currently running system. Any installation scripts that you provide must reference anydirectory or file that is prefixed with the $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT variable. The package must writeall directories and files with the $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT prefix. The package must not removedirectories without a $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT prefix.

Table B–1 provides examples of script syntax.

TABLE B–1 Examples of Installation Script Syntax

Script Type Correct Syntax Incorrect Syntax

Bourne shell “if”statement fragments

if [ -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\

/etc/myproduct.conf ] ; then

if [ -f /etc/myproduct.conf ] ; \

then

Removing a file /bin/rm -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\

/etc/myproduct.conf

/bin/rm -f /etc/myproduct.conf

Changing a file echo "test=no" > ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\

/etc/myproduct.conf

echo "test=no" > \

/etc/myproduct.conf

Differences Between $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT and$BASEDIROverview$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT is the location of the root (/) file system of the machine to which you areadding the package. The location is set to the -R argument of the pkgadd command. Forexample, if the following command is invoked, then $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT becomes /a duringthe installation of the package.

# pkgadd -R /a SUNWvxvm

$BASEDIR points to the relocatable base directory into which relocatable package objects areinstalled. Only relocatable objects are installed here. Nonrelocatable objects (those that haveabsolute paths in the pkgmap file) are always installed relative to the inactive boot environment,but not relative to the $BASEDIR in effect. If a package has no relocatable objects, then thepackage is said to be an absolute package (or nonrelocatable), and $BASEDIR is undefined andnot available to package procedure scripts.

For example, suppose a package's pkgmap file has two entries:

Preventing Modification of the Current OS


1 f none sbin/ls 0555 root sys 3541 12322 1002918510

1 f none /sbin/ls2 0555 root sys 3541 12322 2342423332

The pkginfo file has a specification for $BASEDIR:

BASEDIR=/opt

If this package is installed with the following command, then ls is installed in /a/opt/sbin/ls,but ls2 is installed as /a/sbin/ls2.

# pkgadd -R /a SUNWtest

Guidelines for Writing ScriptsYour package procedure scripts must be independent of the currently running OS to preventmodifying the OS. Procedure scripts define actions that occur at particular points duringpackage installation and removal. Four procedure scripts can be created with these predefinednames: preinstall, postinstall, preremove, and postremove.

TABLE B–2 Guidelines For Creating Scripts

GuidelinesAffects SolarisLive Upgrade

Affectsnon-globalzones

Scripts must be written in Bourne shell (/bin/sh). Bourne shell is the interpreter that is used by thepkgadd command to execute the procedure scripts.

X X

Scripts must not start or stop any processes or depend on the output of commands such as ps or truss,which are operating system dependent and report information about the currently running system.

X X

Scripts are free to use other standard UNIX commands such as expr, cp, and ls and other commandsthat facilitate shell scripting.

X X

Any commands that a script invokes must be available in all supported releases, since a package mustrun on all of those releases. Therefore, you cannot use commands that were added or removed after theSolaris 8 release.

To verify that a specific command or option is supported in a Solaris 8, 9, or 10 release, see the specificversion of Solaris Reference Manual AnswerBook on http://docs.sun.com.

X

Maintaining Diskless Client CompatibilityPackages must not execute commands delivered by the package itself. This is to maintaindiskless client compatibility and avoids running commands that might require shared librariesthat are not installed yet.


Appendix B • Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) 239

http://docs.sun.com

Verifying PackagesAll packages must pass pkgchk validation. After a package is created and before it is installed, itmust be checked with the following command.

# pkgchk -d dir_name pkg_name

dir_name Specifies the name of the directory where the package resides

pkg_name Specifies the name of the package

EXAMPLE B–1 Testing a Package

After a package is created, it must be tested by installing it in an alternate root (/) file systemlocation by using the -R dir_name option to pkgadd. After the package is installed, it must bechecked for correctness by using pkgchk, as in this example.

# pkgadd -d . -R /a SUNWvxvm

# pkgchk -R /a SUNWvxvm

No errors should be displayed.

EXAMPLE B–2 Testing a Package on /export/SUNWvxvm

If a package exists at /export/SUNWvxvm, then you would issue the following command.

# pkgchk -d /export SUNWvxvm

No errors should be displayed.

Other commands can check the package when you are creating, modifying, and deleting files.The following commands are some examples.

■ For example, the dircmp or fssnap commands can be used to verify that packages behaveproperly.

■ Also, the ps command can be used for testing daemon compliance by making sure daemonsare not stopped or started by the package.

■ The truss, pkgadd -v, and pkgrm commands can test runtime package installationcompliance, but might not work in all situations. In the following example, the trusscommand strips out all read-only, non-$TEMPDIR access and shows only non-read-onlyaccess to paths that do not lie within the specified inactive boot environment.

# TEMPDIR=/a; export TEMPDIR

# truss -t open /usr/sbin/pkgadd -R ${TEMPDIR} SUNWvxvm \

2>&1 > /dev/null | grep -v O_RDONLY | grep -v \

’open("’${TEMPDIR}



Preventing User Interaction When Installing or UpgradingPackages must be added or removed without the user being prompted for information whenusing the following standard Solaris utilities.

■ The custom JumpStart program■ Solaris Live Upgrade■ Solaris installation program■ Solaris Zones

To test a package to ensure that it will install with no user interaction, a new administration filecan be set up with the pkgadd command -a option. The -a option defines an installationadministration file to be used in place of the default administration file. Using the default filemight result in the user being prompted for more information. You can create anadministration file that indicates to pkgadd that it should bypass these checks and install thepackage without user confirmation. For details, see the man page admin(4) or pkgadd(1M).

The following examples show how the pkgadd command uses the administration file.

■ If no administration file is provided, pkgadd uses /var/sadm/install/admin/default.Using this file might result in user interaction.

# pkgadd

■ If a relative administration file is provided on the command line, pkgadd looks in/var/sadm/install/admin for the file name and uses it. In this example, the relativeadministration file is named nocheck and pkgadd looks for/var/sadm/install/admin/nocheck.

# pkgadd -a nocheck

■ If an absolute file is provided pkgadd uses it. In this example, pkgadd looks in /tmp for thenocheck administration file.

# pkgadd -a /tmp/nocheck

EXAMPLE B–3 Installation Administration File

The following is an example of an installation administration file that requires very little userinteraction with the pkgadd utility. Unless the package requires more space than is available onthe system, the pkgadd utility uses this file and installs the package without prompting the userfor more information.

mail=

instance=overwrite

partial=nocheck

runlevel=nocheck

idepend=nocheck

space=ask

setuid=nocheck

confiict=nocheck

Preventing User Interaction When Installing or Upgrading


http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5174&id=admin-4

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=pkgadd-1m

EXAMPLE B–3 Installation Administration File (Continued)

action=nocheck

basedir=default

Setting Package Parameters For ZonesPackages have parameters that control how their content is distributed and made visible on asystem with non-global zones installed. The SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES, SUNW_PKG_HOLLOW, andSUNW_PKG_THISZONE package parameters define the characteristics of packages on a system withzones installed. These parameters must be set so that packages can be administered in a systemwith non-global zones.

The following table lists the four valid combinations for setting package parameters. If youchoose setting combinations that are not listed in the following table, those settings are invalidand result in the package failing to install.

Note – Ensure that you have set all three package parameters. You can leave all three packageparameters blank. The package tools interpret a missing zone package parameter as if thesetting were “false,” but not setting the parameters is strongly discouraged. By setting all threepackage parameters, you specify the exact behavior the package tools should exhibit wheninstalling or removing the package.

TABLE B–3 Valid Package Parameter Settings For Zones

SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES

SettingSUNW_PKG_HOLLOW

SettingSUNW_PKG_THISZONE

Setting Package Description

false false false This is the default setting for packages that do notspecify values for all the zone package parameters.

A package with these settings can be installed in eitherthe global zone or a non-global zone.■ If the pkgadd command is run in the global zone,

the package is installed in the global zone and in allnon-global zones.

■ If the pkgadd command is run in a non-global zone,the package is installed in the non-global zone only.

In both cases, the entire contents of the package isvisible in all zones where the package is installed.

Setting Package Parameters For Zones


TABLE B–3 Valid Package Parameter Settings For Zones (Continued)SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES




false false true A package with these settings can be installed in eitherthe global zone or a non-global zone. If new non-globalzones are created after the installation, the package isnot propagated to these new non-global zones.■ If the pkgadd command is run in the global zone,

the package is installed in the global zone only.

■ If the pkgadd command is run in a non-global zone,the package is installed in the non-global zone only.

In both cases, the entire contents of the package isvisible in the zone where the package is installed.

true false false A package with these settings can be installed in theglobal zone only. When the pkgadd command is run,the package is installed in the global zone and in allnon-global zones. The entire contents of the package isvisible in all zones.

Note – Any attempt to install the package in a non-globalzone fails.



TABLE B–3 Valid Package Parameter Settings For Zones (Continued)SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES




true true false A package with these settings can only be installed inthe global zone, by the global administrator. When thepkgadd command is run, the contents of the package isfully installed in the global zone. If a package has thepackage parameters set to these values, the packagecontent itself is not delivered on any non-global zone.Only the package installation information necessary tomake the package appear to be installed is installed onall non-global zones. This enables the installation ofother packages to be installed that depend on thispackage. For more information on “hollow” packages,see Chapter 25, “About Packages and Patches on aSolaris System With Zones Installed (Overview),” inSystem Administration Guide: Oracle SolarisContainers-Resource Management and Oracle SolarisZones.

For package dependency checking purposes, thepackage appears to be installed in all zones.■ In the global zone, the entire contents of the

package is visible.

■ In whole root non-global zones, the entire contentsof the package is not visible.

■ When a non-global zone inherits a file system fromthe global zone, a package installed in this filesystem is visible in a non-global zone. All other filesdelivered by the package are not visible within thenon-global zone.For example, a sparse root non-global zone sharescertain directories with the global zone. Thesedirectories are read-only. Sparse root non-globalzones share the /platform file system amongothers. Another example is packages that deliverfiles relevant only to booting hardware.

Note – Any attempt to install the package in a non-globalzone fails.



http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1592&id=z.pkginst.ov-1






For more details on packages and zones Chapter 25, “About Packages and Patches on a SolarisSystem With Zones Installed (Overview),” in SystemAdministration Guide: Oracle SolarisContainers-Resource Management and Oracle SolarisZones

For an overview of sparse and whole root zones Chapter 16, “Introduction to Solaris Zones,” in SystemAdministration Guide: Oracle SolarisContainers-Resource Management and Oracle SolarisZones

For information about package characteristics andparameters

pkginfo(4)

For information about displaying package parametervalues

pkgparam(1)

For Background InformationThe following references provide background information about packaging requirements andspecific command syntax.

For more specific informationabout packaging requirements anddefinitions of terminology

Chapter 6, “Advanced Techniques for Creating Packages,” in ApplicationPackaging Developer’s Guide

For basic information about addingand removing packages and theinstallation administration file

Chapter 20, “Managing Software (Overview),” in System AdministrationGuide: Basic Administration

For detailed information aboutspecific commands that arereferenced in this appendix, seethese man pages

dircmp(1), fssnap(1M), ps(1), or truss(1) pkgadd(1M), pkgchk(1M),or pkgrm(1M)

For an overview of Solaris LiveUpgrade

Chapter 2, “Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview)”

For an overview of customJumpStart

Chapter 2, “Custom JumpStart (Overview),” in Oracle Solaris 10 9/10Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations

For an overview of Solaris Zones Chapter 16, “Introduction to Solaris Zones,” in System AdministrationGuide: Oracle Solaris Containers-Resource Management and OracleSolaris Zones

For Background Information







http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1592&id=zones.intro-1




http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5174&id=pkginfo-4

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5165&id=pkgparam-1

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-0406&id=ch6advtech-96543

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-0406&id=ch6advtech-96543

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=swmgrpkgsconcepts-52619

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=817-1985&id=swmgrpkgsconcepts-52619

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5165&id=dircmp-1

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=fssnap-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5165&id=ps-1

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5165&id=truss-1

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=pkgadd-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=pkgchk-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=816-5166&id=pkgrm-1m

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=jumpstartoverview-4

http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=821-1911&id=jumpstartoverview-4




246

Using the Patch Analyzer When Upgrading(Tasks)

This chapter provides instructions on checking patches with the Patch Analyzer beforeupgrading the Solaris OS. The Patch Analyzer performs an analysis on your system if you wantto upgrade to one of these releases that follow the initial Solaris 10 3/05 release.

■ Solaris 10 1/06 release■ Solaris 10 6/06 release■ Solaris 10 11/06■ Solaris 10 8/07■ Solaris 10 5/08■ Solaris 10 10/08

Upgrading to a Solaris Update ReleaseIf you are already running the 10 3/05 release OS and have installed individual patches,upgrading to a subsequent Solaris 10 release causes the following:

■ Any patches that are supplied as part of one of the releases noted above are reapplied to yoursystem. You cannot back out these patches.

■ Any patches that were previously installed on your system that are not included in one of thereleases noted above are removed.

The Patch Analyzer performs an analysis on your system to determine which patches, if any,will be removed by upgrading to any of the above releases. The Patch Analyzer is available in thefollowing formats.

■ If you are using the Solaris installation program to upgrade, the Patch Analyzer dialog boxappears. Select Yes to perform the analysis.

■ If you are using the text installer to upgrade, select Analyze on the Analyze Patches dialogbox to perform the analysis.

CA P P E N D I X C

247

■ If you are using a custom JumpStart installation or Solaris Live Upgrade to upgrade, run theanalyze_patches script to perform the analysis. For detailed instructions, see “To Run theanalyze_patches Script” on page 248.

After you perform the analysis, refer to “To Review the Patch Analyzer Output” on page 249 fordetailed information about the patch analysis results.

▼ To Run the analyze_patches Script

Note – To run the analyze_patches script, the installed system and the Solaris OperatingSystem DVD, Solaris Software CDs, or network installation image must be accessible by thescript either through NFS or locally mounted media.

Change to the Miscdirectory.

In this example, the image is located on locally mounted media.# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/Solaris_10/Misc

Run the analyze_patches script.# ./analyze_patches -R rootdir -N netdir -D databasedir

-R rootdir rootdir is the root of the installed system. The default is /.

-N netdir netdir is the path to the root of the OS image to be installed. The default is/cdrom/cdrom0. netdir is the path to the directory that contains theSolaris_10 directory. You must use this option if you are running thepatch_analyzer from an NFS mount point.

-D databasedir If the script is invoked from a directory other than the Misc/ directory in theOS image, the program cannot find the database it uses for patch analysis.Use the -D option to supply the path to the database. Without this database,which is located in Solaris_10 /Misc/database on the OS image, thescript does not work properly.

1

2

Upgrading to a Solaris Update Release


▼ To Review the Patch Analyzer OutputAfter you perform the analysis, use these steps to review the output.

Review the output of the Patch Analyzer.The Patch Analyzer provides a list of patches that will be removed, downgraded, accumulated,or obsoleted by other patches. Patch accumulations are similar to patch upgrades. Theaccumulated patch is removed and its fixes are delivered by a new patch. Messages such as thefollowing are shown:Patch 105644-03 will be removed.

Patch 105925 will be downgraded from -02 to -01.

Patch 105776-01 will be accumulated/obsoleted by patch 105181-05.

If the Patch Analyzer program does not provide a list, no action is taken against any patches thatwere previously installed on your system.

Decide if the patch replacements and deletions are acceptable.

■ If yes, upgrade the system.■ If no, do not upgrade the system.

1

2

Upgrading to a Solaris Update Release

Appendix C • Using the Patch Analyzer When Upgrading (Tasks) 249

250

Glossary

3DES ([Triple DES] Triple-Data Encryption Standard). A symmetric-key encryption method that provides a keylength of 168 bits.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) A symmetric 128-bit block data encryption technique. The U.S.government adopted the Rijndael variant of the algorithm as its encryption standard in October 2000. AESreplaces DES encryption as the government standard.

archive A file that contains a collection of files that were copied from a master system. The file also containsidentification information about the archive, such as a name and the date that you created the archive.After you install an archive on a system, the system contains the exact configuration of the master system.

An archive could be a differential archive, which is a Solaris Flash archive that contains only the differencesbetween two system images, an unchanged master image and an updated master image. The differentialarchive contains files to be retained, modified, or deleted from the clone system. A differential updatechanges only the files specified and is restricted to systems that contain software consistent with theunchanged master image.

arrow keys One of the four directional keys on the numeric keypad.

begin script A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the rules file, that performs tasks before the Solarissoftware is installed on the system. You can use begin scripts only with custom JumpStart installations.

boot To load the system software into memory and start it.

boot archive x86 only: A boot archive is a collection of critical files that is used to boot the Solaris OS. These files areneeded during system startup before the root (/) file system is mounted. Two boot archives are maintainedon a system:■ The boot archive that is used to boot the Solaris OS on a system. This boot archive is sometimes called the

primary boot archive.

■ The boot archive that is used for recovery when the primary boot archive is damaged. This boot archivestarts the system without mounting the root (/) file system. On the GRUB menu, this boot archive is calledfailsafe. The archive's essential purpose is to regenerate the primary boot archive, which is usually used toboot the system.

boot environment A collection of mandatory file systems (disk slices and mount points) that are critical to the operation ofthe Solaris OS. These disk slices might be on the same disk or distributed across multiple disks.

251

The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted. Exactly one active boot environment canbe booted. An inactive boot environment is not currently booted, but can be in a state of waiting foractivation on the next reboot.

boot loader x86 only: The boot loader is the first software program that runs after you turn on a system. This programbegins the booting process.

boot server A server system that provides client systems on the same network subnet with the programs andinformation that they need to start. A boot server is required to install over the network if the install serveris on a different subnet than the systems on which Solaris software is to be installed.

bootlog-cgi

programThe CGI program that enables a web server to collect and store remote client-booting and installationconsole messages during a WAN boot installation.

certificateauthority

(CA) A trusted third-party organization or company that issues digital certificates that are used to createdigital signatures and public-private key pairs. The CA guarantees that the individual who is granted theunique certificate is who she or he claims to be.

certstore file A file that contains a digital certificate for a specific client system. During an SSL negotiation, the clientmight be asked to provide the certificate file to the server. The server uses this file to verify the identity ofthe client.

CGI (Common Gateway Interface) An interface by which external programs communicate with the HTTPserver. Programs that are written to use CGI are called CGI programs or CGI scripts. CGI programshandle forms or parse output the server does not normally handle or parse.

checksum The result of adding a group of data items that are used for checking the group. The data items can beeither numerals or other character strings that are treated as numerals during the checksum calculation.The checksum value verifies that communication between two devices is successful.

client In the client-server model for communications, the client is a process that remotely accesses resources of acompute server, such as compute power and large memory capacity.

clone system A system that you install by using a Solaris Flash archive. The clone system has the same installationconfiguration as the master system.

cluster A logical collection of packages (software modules). The Solaris software is divided into software groups,which are each composed of clusters and packages.

command line A string of characters that begins with a command, often followed by arguments, including options, filenames, and other expressions, and terminated by the end-of-line character.

concatenation A RAID-0 volume. If slices are concatenated, the data is written to the first available slice until that slice isfull. When that slice is full, the data is written to the next slice, serially. A concatenation provides no dataredundancy unless it is contained in a mirror. See also RAID-0 volume.

Core SoftwareGroup

A software group that contains the minimum software that is required to boot and run the Solaris OS on asystem. Core includes some networking software and the drivers that are required to run the CommonDesktop Environment (CDE) desktop. Core does not include the CDE software.

boot loader


critical file systems File systems that are required by the Solaris OS. When you use Solaris Live Upgrade, these file systems areseparate mount points in the vfstab file of the active and inactive boot environments. Example filesystems are root (/), /usr, /var, and /opt. These file systems are always copied from the source to theinactive boot environment.

custom JumpStart A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically installed on a system that is based on auser-defined profile. You can create customized profiles for different types of users and systems. A customJumpStart installation is a JumpStart installation you create.

custom probes file A file, which must be located in the same JumpStart directory as the rules file, that is a Bourne shell scriptthat contains two types of functions: probe and comparison. Probe functions gather the information youwant or do the actual work and set a corresponding SI_ environment variable you define. Probe functionsbecome probe keywords. Comparison functions call a corresponding probe function, compare the outputof the probe function, and return 0 if the keyword matches or 1 if the keyword doesn't match. Comparisonfunctions become rule keywords. See also rules file.

dataset A generic name for the following ZFS entities: clones, file systems, snapshots, or volumes.

decryption The process of converting coded data to plain text. See also encryption.

derived profile A profile that is dynamically created by a begin script during a custom JumpStart installation.

DES (Data Encryption Standard) A symmetric-key encryption method that was developed in 1975 andstandardized by ANSI in 1981 as ANSI X.3.92. DES uses a 56-bit key.

Developer SolarisSoftware Group

A software group that contains the End User Solaris Software Group plus the libraries, include files, manpages, and programming tools for developing software.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) An application-layer protocol. Enables individual computers, orclients, on a TCP/IP network to extract an IP address and other network configuration information from adesignated and centrally maintained DHCP server or servers. This facility reduces the overhead ofmaintaining and administering a large IP network.

differential archive A Solaris Flash archive that contains only the differences between two system images, an unchangedmaster image and an updated master image. The differential archive contains files to be retained,modified, or deleted from the clone system. A differential update changes only the files that are specifiedand is restricted to systems that contain software consistent with the unchanged master image.

digital certificate A nontransferable, nonforgeable, digital file issued from a third party that both communicating partiesalready trust.

disc An optical disc, as opposed to a magnetic disk, which recognizes the common spelling that is used in thecompact disc (CD) market. For example, a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM is an optical disc.

disk A round platter, or set of platters, of a magnetized medium that is organized into concentric tracks andsectors for storing data such as files. See also disc.

disk configurationfile

A file that represents a structure of a disk (for example, bytes/sector, flags, slices). Disk configuration filesenable you to use the pfinstall command from a single system to test profiles on different–size disks.

diskless client A client on a network that relies on a server for all of its disk storage.

diskless client

253

document rootdirectory

The root of a hierarchy on a web server machine that contains the files, images, and data you want topresent to users who are accessing the web server.

domain A part of the Internet naming hierarchy. A domain represents a group of systems on a local network thatshare administrative files.

domain name The name that is assigned to a group of systems on a local network that share administrative files. Thedomain name is required for the Network Information Service (NIS) database to work properly. A domainname consists of a sequence of component names that are separated by periods (for example:tundra.mpk.ca.us). As you read a domain name from left to right, the component names identify moregeneral (and usually remote) areas of administrative authority.

encryption The process of protecting information from unauthorized use by making the information unintelligible.Encryption is based on a code, called a key, which is used to decrypt the information. See also decryption.

End User SolarisSoftware Group

A software group that contains the Core Software Group plus the recommended software for an end user,including the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) and DeskSet software.

Entire SolarisSoftware Group

A software group that contains the entire Solaris release.

Entire SolarisSoftware GroupPlus OEM Support

A software group that contains the entire Solaris release plus additional hardware support for OEMs. Thissoftware group is recommended when installing Solaris software on SPARC based servers.

/etc directory A directory that contains critical system configuration files and maintenance commands.

/etc/netboot

directoryThe directory on a WAN boot server that contains the client configuration information and security datathat are required for a WAN boot installation.

/export file system A file system on an OS server that is shared with other systems on a network. For example, the /export filesystem can contain the root (/) file system and swap space for diskless clients and the home directories forusers on the network. Diskless clients rely on the /export file system on an OS server to boot and run.

failsafe bootarchive

x86 only: A boot archive that is used for recovery when the primary boot archive is damaged. This bootarchive starts the system without mounting the root (/) file system. This boot archive is called failsafe onthe GRUB menu. The archive's essential purpose is to regenerate the primary boot archive, which isusually used to boot the system. See boot archive.

fallback A reversion to the environment that ran previously. Use fallback when you are activating an environmentand the boot environment that is designated for booting fails or shows some undesirable behavior.

fdisk partition A logical partition of a disk drive that is dedicated to a particular operating system on x86 based systems.To install the Solaris software, you must set up at least one Solaris fdisk partition on an x86 based system.x86 based systems allow up to four different fdisk partitions on a disk. These partitions can be used tohold individual operating systems. Each operating system must be located on a unique fdisk partition. Asystem can only have one Solaris fdisk partition per disk.

file server A server that provides the software and file storage for systems on a network.

file system In the SunOS operating system, a tree-structured network of files and directories that you can access.

document root directory


finish script A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the rules file, that performs tasks after the Solarissoftware is installed on the system but before the system reboots. You use finish scripts with customJumpStart installations.

format To put data into a structure or divide a disk into sectors for receiving data.

function key One of the 10 or more keyboard keys that are labeled F1, F2, F3, and so on that are mapped to particulartasks.

global zone In Solaris Zones, the global zone is both the default zone for the system and the zone used for system-wideadministrative control. The global zone is the only zone from which a non-global zone can be configured,installed, managed, or uninstalled. Administration of the system infrastructure, such as physical devices,routing, or dynamic reconfiguration (DR), is only possible in the global zone. Appropriately privilegedprocesses running in the global zone can access objects associated with other zones. See also Solaris Zonesand non-global zone.

GRUB x86 only: GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) is an open source boot loader with a simple menuinterface. The menu displays a list of operating systems that are installed on a system. GRUB enables youto easily boot these various operating systems, such as the Solaris OS, Linux, or Microsoft Windows.

GRUB edit menu x86 only: A boot menu that is a submenu of the GRUB main menu. GRUB commands are displayed onthis menu. These commands can be edited to change boot behavior.

GRUB main menu x86 only: A boot menu that lists the operating systems that are installed on a system. From this menu, youcan easily boot an operating system without modifying the BIOS or fdisk partition settings.

hard link A directory entry that references a file on disk. More than one such directory entry can reference the samephysical file.

hash A number that is produced by taking some input and generating a number that is significantly shorterthan the input. The same output value is always generated for identical inputs. Hash functions can be usedin table search algorithms, in error detection, and in tamper detection. When used for tamper detection,hash functions are chosen such that it is difficult to find two inputs that yield the same hash result. MD5and SHA-1 are examples of one-way hash functions. For example, a message digest takes a variable-lengthinput such as a disk file and reduces it to a small value.

hashing The process of changing a string of characters into a value or key that represents the original string.

HMAC Keyed hashing method for message authentication. HMAC is used with an iterative cryptographic hashfunction, such as MD5 or SHA-1, in combination with a secret shared key. The cryptographic strength ofHMAC depends on the properties of the underlying hash function.

host name The name by which a system is known to other systems on a network. This name must be unique amongall the systems within a particular domain (usually, this means within any single organization). A hostname can be any combination of letters, numbers, and minus signs (-), but it cannot begin or end with aminus sign.

HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) (n.) The Internet protocol that fetches hypertext objects from remote hosts.This protocol is based on TCP/IP.

HTTPS A secure version of HTTP, implemented by using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).

HTTPS

255

initial installation An installation that overwrites the currently running software or initializes a blank disk.

An initial installation of the Solaris OS overwrites the system's disk or disks with the new version of theSolaris OS. If your system is not running the Solaris OS, you must perform an initial installation. If yoursystem is running an upgradable version of the Solaris OS, an initial installation overwrites the disk anddoes not preserve the OS or local modifications.

install server A server that provides the Solaris DVD or CD images from which other systems on a network can installSolaris (also called a media server). You can create an install server by copying the Solaris DVD or CDimages to the server's hard disk.

IPv6 IPv6 is a version (version 6) of Internet Protocol (IP) that is designed to be an evolutionary step from thecurrent version, IPv4 (version 4). Deploying IPv6, by using defined transition mechanisms, does notdisrupt current operations. In addition, IPv6 provides a platform for new Internet functionality.

job A user-defined task to be completed by a computer system.

JumpStartdirectory

When you use a profile diskette for custom JumpStart installations, the JumpStart directory is the rootdirectory on the diskette that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files. When you use a profileserver for custom JumpStart installations, the JumpStart directory is a directory on the server that containsall the essential custom JumpStart files.

JumpStartinstallation

A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically installed on a system by using thefactory-installed JumpStart software.

Kerberos A network authentication protocol that uses strong, secret-key cryptography to enable a client and serverto identify themselves to each other over an insecure network connection.

key The code for encrypting or decrypting data. See also encryption.

keystore file A file that contains keys shared by a client and server. During a WAN boot installation, the client systemuses the keys to verify the integrity of, or decrypt the data and files transmitted from, the server.

LAN (local area network) A group of computer systems in close proximity that can communicate by way ofsome connecting hardware and software.

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) A standard, extensible directory access protocol that is used byLDAP naming service clients and servers to communicate with each other.

locale A geographic or political region or community that shares the same language, customs, or culturalconventions (English for the U.S. is en_US, and English for the U.K. is en_UK).

logical device A group of physical slices on one or more disks that appear to the system as a single device. A logical deviceis called a volume in Solaris Volume Manager. A volume is functionally identical to a physical disk for thepurposes of an application or file system.

manifest section A section of a Solaris Flash archive that is used to validate a clone system. The manifest section lists the fileson a system to be retained, added to, or deleted from the clone system. This section is informational only.The section lists the files in an internal format and cannot be used for scripting.

master system A system that you use to create a Solaris Flash archive. The system configuration is saved in the archive.

initial installation


MD5 (Message Digest 5) An iterative cryptographic hash function that is used for message authentication,including digital signatures. The function was developed in 1991 by Rivest.

media server See install server.

menu.lst file x86 only: A file that lists all the operating systems that are installed on a system. The contents of this filedictate the list of operating systems that is displayed on the GRUB menu. From the GRUB menu, you caneasily boot an operating system without modifying the BIOS or fdisk partition settings.

metadevice See volume.

miniroot A minimal, bootable root (/) file system that is included in Solaris installation media. A miniroot consistsof the Solaris software that is required to install and upgrade systems. On x86 based systems, the minirootis copied to the system to be used as the failsafe boot archive. See failsafe boot archive.

mirror See RAID-1 volume.

mount The process of accessing a directory from a disk that is attached to a machine that is making the mountrequest or a remote disk on a network. To mount a file system, you need a mount point on the local systemand the name of the file system to be mounted (for example, /usr).

mount point A workstation directory to which you mount a file system that exists on a remote machine.

name server A server that provides a naming service to systems on a network.

naming service A distributed network database that contains key system information about all the systems on a networkso that the systems can communicate with each other. With a naming service, the system information canbe maintained, managed, and accessed on a network-wide basis. Without a naming service, each systemhas to maintain its own copy of the system information in the local /etc files. Sun supports the followingnaming services: LDAP, NIS, and NIS+.

networkinstallation

A way to install software over the network from a system with a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive to a systemwithout a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Network installations require a name server and an install server.

networked systems A group of systems (called hosts) that are connected through hardware and software so that they cancommunicate and share information. Referred to as a local area network (LAN). One or more servers areusually needed when systems are networked.

NIS The SunOS 4.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. A distributed network database that containskey information about the systems and the users on the network. The NIS database is stored on the masterserver and all the slave servers.

NIS+ The SunOS 5.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. NIS+ replaces NIS, the SunOS 4.0 (minimum)Network Information Service.

non-global zone A virtualized operating system environment created within a single instance of the Solaris OperatingSystem. One or more applications can run in a non-global zone without interacting with the rest of thesystem. Non-global zones are also called zones. See also Solaris Zones and global zone.

nonnetworkedsystems

Systems that are not connected to a network or do not rely on other systems.

nonnetworked systems

257

/opt file system A file system that contains the mount points for third-party and unbundled software.

OS server A system that provides services to systems on a network. To serve diskless clients, an OS server must havedisk space set aside for each diskless client's root (/) file system and swap space (/export/root,/export/swap).

package A collection of software that is grouped into a single entity for modular installation. The Solaris software isdivided into software groups, which are each composed of clusters and packages.

panel A container for organizing the contents of a window, a dialog box, or applet. The panel might collect andconfirm user input. Panels might be used by wizards and follow an ordered sequence to fulfill a designatedtask.

patch analyzer A script that you can run manually or as part of the Solaris installation program. The patch analyzerperforms an analysis on your system to determine which (if any) patches will be removed by upgrading toa Solaris update.

platform group A vendor-defined grouping of hardware platforms for the purpose of distributing specific software.Examples of valid platform groups are i86pc and sun4u.

platform name The output of the uname -i command. For example, the platform name for the Ultra 60 isSUNW,Ultra-60.

pool A logical group of devices describing the layout and physical characteristics of the available ZFS storage.Space for datasets is allocated from a pool.

PowerManagement

Software that automatically saves the state of a system and turns it off after it is idle for 30 minutes. Whenyou install the Solaris software on a system that complies with Version 2 of the U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency's Energy Star guidelines, the Power Management software is installed by default. Asun4u SPARC based system is an example of a system that has Power Management installed by default.After a subsequent reboot, you are prompted to enable or disable the Power Management software.

Energy Star guidelines require that systems or monitors automatically enter a “sleep state” (consume 30watts or less) after the system or monitor becomes inactive.

primary bootarchive

A boot archive that is used to boot the Solaris OS on a system. This boot archive is sometimes called theprimary boot archive. See boot archive.

private key The decryption key used in public-key encryption.

probe keyword A syntactical element that extracts attribute information about a system when using the custom JumpStartmethod to install. A probe keyword does not require you to set up a matching condition and run a profileas required for a rule. See also rule.

profile A text file that defines how to install the Solaris software when using the custom JumpStart method. Forexample, a profile defines which software group to install. Every rule specifies a profile that defines how asystem is to be installed when the rule is matched. You usually create a different profile for every rule.However, the same profile can be used in more than one rule. See also rules file.

profile diskette A diskette that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files in its root directory (JumpStart directory).

profile server A server that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files in a JumpStart directory.

/opt file system


public key The encryption key used in public-key encryption.

public-keycryptography

A cryptographic system that uses two keys: a public key known to everyone, and a private key known onlyto the recipient of the message.

RAID-0 volume A class of volume that can be a stripe or a concatenation. These components are also called submirrors. Astripe or concatenation is the basic building block for mirrors.

RAID-1 volume A class of volume that replicates data by maintaining multiple copies. A RAID-1 volume is composed ofone or more RAID-0 volumes called submirrors. A RAID-1 volume is sometimes called a mirror.

RAID-Z storagepool

A virtual device that stores data and parity on multiple disks that can be used as a ZFS storage pool.RAID-Z is similar to RAID-5.

Reduced NetworkSupport SoftwareGroup

A software group that contains the minimum code that is required to boot and run a Solaris system withlimited network service support. The Reduced Networking Software Group provides a multiusertext-based console and system administration utilities. This software group also enables the system torecognize network interfaces, but does not activate network services.

root The top level of a hierarchy of items. Root is the one item from which all other items are descended. Seeroot directory or root (/) file system.

root (/) file system The top-level file system from which all other file systems stem. The root (/) file system is the base onwhich all other file systems are mounted, and is never unmounted. The root (/) file system contains thedirectories and files critical for system operation, such as the kernel, device drivers, and the programs thatare used to start (boot) a system.

root directory The top-level directory from which all other directories stem.

rule A series of values that assigns one or more system attributes to a profile. A rule is used in a customJumpStart installation.

rules file A text file that contains a rule for each group of systems or single systems that you want to installautomatically. Each rule distinguishes a group of systems, based on one or more system attributes. Therules file links each group to a profile, which is a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to beinstalled on each system in the group. A rules file is used in a custom JumpStart installation. See alsoprofile.

rules.ok file A generated version of the rules file. The rules.ok file is required by the custom JumpStart installationsoftware to match a system to a profile. You must use the check script to create the rules.ok file.

Secure SocketsLayer

(SSL) A software library establishing a secure connection between two parties (client and server) used toimplement HTTPS, the secure version of HTTP.

server A network device that manages resources and supplies services to a client.

SHA1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm) The algorithm that operates on any input length less than 264 to produce amessage digest.

SHA1

259

shareable filesystems

File systems that are user-defined files such as /export/home and /swap. These file systems are sharedbetween the active and inactive boot environment when you use Solaris Live Upgrade. Shareable filesystems contain the same mount point in the vfstab file in both the active and inactive bootenvironments. Updating shared files in the active boot environment also updates data in the inactive bootenvironment. Shareable file systems are shared by default, but you can specify a destination slice, and thenthe file systems are copied.

slice The unit into which the disk space is divided by the software.

snapshot A read-only image of a ZFS file system or volume at a given point in time.

software group A logical grouping of the Solaris software (clusters and packages). During a Solaris installation, you caninstall one of the following software groups: Core, End User Solaris Software, Developer Solaris Software,or Entire Solaris Software, and for SPARC systems only, Entire Solaris Software Group Plus OEM Support.

Solaris DVD or CDimages

The Solaris software that is installed on a system, which you can access on the Solaris DVDs or CDs or aninstall server's hard disk to which you have copied the Solaris DVD or CD images.

Solaris Flash A Solaris installation feature that enables you to create an archive of the files on a system, called the mastersystem. You can then use the archive to install other systems, making the other systems identical in theirconfiguration to the master system. See also archive.

Solaris installationprogram

A graphical user interface (GUI) or command-line interface (CLI) installation program that uses wizardpanels to guide you step-by-step through installing the Solaris software and third-party software.

Solaris LiveUpgrade

An upgrade method that enables a duplicate boot environment to be upgraded while the active bootenvironment is still running, thus eliminating downtime of the production environment.

Solaris Zones A software partitioning technology used to virtualize operating system services and provide an isolatedand secure environment for running applications. When you create a non-global zone, you produce anapplication execution environment in which processes are isolated from all other zones. This isolationprevents processes that are running in a zone from monitoring or affecting processes that are running inany other zones. See also global zone and non-global zone.

standalone A computer that does not require support from any other machine.

state database A database that stores information about the state of your Solaris Volume Manager configuration. Thestate database is a collection of multiple, replicated database copies. Each copy is referred to as a statedatabase replica. The state database tracks the location and status of all known state database replicas.

state databasereplica

A copy of a state database. The replica ensures that the data in the database is valid.

submirror See RAID-0 volume.

subnet A working scheme that divides a single logical network into smaller physical networks to simplify routing.

subnet mask A bit mask that is used to select bits from an Internet address for subnet addressing. The mask is 32 bitslong and selects the network portion of the Internet address and 1 or more bits of the local portion.

superuser A special user who has privileges to perform all administrative tasks on the system. The superuser has theability to read and write to any file, run all programs, and send kill signals to any process.

shareable file systems


swap space A slice or file that temporarily holds the contents of a memory area till it can be reloaded in memory. Alsocalled the /swap or swap volume.

sysidcfg file A file in which you specify a set of special system configuration keywords that preconfigure a system.

systemconfiguration file

(system.conf) A text file in which you specify the locations of the sysidcfg file and the custom JumpStartfiles you want to use in a WAN boot installation.

time zone Any of the 24 longitudinal divisions of the earth's surface for which a standard time is kept.

truststore file A file that contains one or more digital certificates. During a WAN boot installation, the client systemverifies the identity of the server that is trying to perform the installation by consulting the data in thetruststore file.

unmount The process of removing access to a directory on a disk that is attached to a machine or to a remote disk ona network.

update An installation, or to perform an installation, on a system that changes software that is of the same type.Unlike an upgrade, an update might downgrade the system. Unlike an initial installation, software of thesame type that is being installed must be present before an update can occur.

upgrade An installation that merges files with existing files and preserves modifications where possible.

An upgrade of the Solaris OS merges the new version of the Solaris OS with the existing files on thesystem's disk or disks. An upgrade saves as many modifications as possible that you have made to theprevious version of the Solaris OS.

upgrade option An option that is presented by the Solaris installation. The upgrade procedure merges the new version ofSolaris with existing files on your disk or disks. An upgrade also saves as many local modifications aspossible since the last time Solaris was installed.

URL (Uniform Resource Locator) The addressing system used by the server and the client to requestdocuments. A URL is often called a location. The format of a URL is protocol://machine:port/document.

A sample URL is http://www.example.com/index.html.

/usr file system A file system on a standalone system or server that contains many of the standard UNIX programs.Sharing the large /usr file system with a server rather than maintaining a local copy minimizes the overalldisk space that is required to install and run the Solaris software on a system.

utility A standard program, usually furnished at no charge with the purchase of a computer, that does thecomputer's housekeeping.

/var file system A file system or directory (on standalone systems) that contains system files that are likely to change orgrow over the life of the system. These files include system logs, vi files, mail files, and UUCP files.

virtual device A logical device in a ZFS pool, which can be a physical device, a file, or a collection of devices.

volume A group of physical slices or other volumes that appear to the system as a single logical device. A volume isfunctionally identical to a physical disk for the purposes of an application or file system.

In some command-line utilities, a volume is called a metadevice. Volume is also called pseudo device orvirtual device in standard UNIX terms.

volume

261

Volume Manager A program that provides a mechanism to administer and obtain access to the data on DVD-ROMs,CD-ROMs, and diskettes.

WAN (wide area network) A network that connects multiple local area networks (LANs) or systems at differentgeographical sites by using telephone, fiber-optic, or satellite links.

WAN bootinstallation

A type of installation that enables you to boot and install software over a wide area network (WAN) byusing HTTP or HTTPS. The WAN boot installation method enables you to transmit an encrypted SolarisFlash archive over a public network and perform a custom JumpStart installation on a remote client.

WAN bootminiroot

A miniroot that has been modified to perform a WAN boot installation. The WAN boot miniroot containsa subset of the software in the Solaris miniroot. See also miniroot.

WAN boot server A web server that provides the configuration and security files that are used during a WAN bootinstallation.

wanboot-cgi

programThe CGI program that retrieves and transmits the data and files that are used in a WAN boot installation.

wanboot.conf file A text file in which you specify the configuration information and security settings that are required toperform a WAN boot installation.

wanboot program The second-level boot program that loads the WAN boot miniroot, client configuration files, andinstallation files that are required to perform a WAN boot installation. For WAN boot installations, thewanboot binary performs tasks similar to the ufsboot or inetboot second-level boot programs.

ZFS A file system using storage pools to manage physical storage.

zone See non-global zone

Volume Manager


Index

Aactivating a boot environment

description, 38failure, description, 40synchronizing files, description, 54tasks, 110

archivescreating an empty boot environment for, 77example of installing, 35installing on a boot environment, 105

Bboot: cannot open /kernel/unix message, 220boot environment, failure of, description, 40bootparams file, updating, 225

CCan't boot from file/device message, 220cancel a Solaris Live Upgrade job, 131CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE message, 226change name of a boot environment, 134CLIENT MAC ADDR error message, 225clock gained xxx days message, 220commands for Solaris Live Upgrade, 171compare boot environments, 131compare file systems, non-global zones, 155concatenation, description, 29copying, file systems, 130

creatinga boot environment, description, 22a boot environment, tasks, 64, 67, 69RAID-1 volume (mirror), description, 27task map, 59–60tasks

for ZFS, 191critical file systems, definition, 22customizing content, 53

Ddeleting, a boot environment, 132disk space requirements, 46displaying, name of a boot environment, 133

E/etc/bootparams file, enabling JumpStart directory

access, 225examples, 157

complete processcomplete process, 157

creating mirrors, 83, 84creating RAID-1 volumes, 82, 83customizing content, 86, 87upgrading a RAID-1 volume, 165, 168

263

Ffailed upgrade

rebooting problems, 230recovery, 117

files and file systemscreating RAID-1 volumes (mirrors), description, 27description, 22estimating size, 46guidelines for creating, 48guidelines for selecting a slice, 49sharing file systems between boot environments, 52

Iinstalling

a Solaris Flash archive, 105a Solaris Flash archive with a profile, 109packages, 60

Kkeywords

profile, 99, 100volumes, 81

Lle0: No carrier - transceiver cable problem

message, 220lumount command, non-global zones, 156

Mmigrating from UFS to ZFS, 191

with non-global zones, 209mirror, See RAID-1 volume

NNo carrier - transceiver cable problem message, 220

non-global zonesadministering boot environments, 154compare file systems, 155graphic of, 142list file systems, 154lumount command, 156migrating from UFS to ZFS, 209overview, 141separate file system, 147step-by-step procedure, 148upgrade example, 153

Not a UFS filesystem message, 220

Ooverview, 19

for ZFS, 175graphic, 20

Ppackages

adding, 47, 91requirements for Solaris Live Upgrade, 237requirements when using custom JumpStart, 237

Patch Analyzer, 247–249patches

adding, 47, 91checking patch levels, 44, 63

planning, 43for ZFS, 187

profile keywordsforced_deployment

description and values, 100local_customization

description and values, 101profiles

example, 101example for differential archives, 102

Index


RRAID-0 volume, description, 29RAID-1 volume (mirror)

description, 27, 29example of creating, 82, 83, 84example of creating and upgrading, 165example of migrating to Solaris Volume Manager

volumes, 168requirements, 50

required packages, 45requirements, to use Solaris Live Upgrade, 43root (/) file systems, package requirements for an

inactive boot environment, 237RPC Timed out message, 225

Sselecting slices for RAID-1 volumes (mirrors), 50shareable file systems, definition, 22slices, guidelines for selecting, 49Solaris Volume Manager

commands used with Solaris Live Upgrade, 51example

detaching and upgrading a RAID-1 volume, 165migrating to a RAID-1 volume, 168

state database, description, 29status, display boot environment, 128submirror, description, 29swap file systems, guidelines for selecting a slice, 52

Ttesting, profiles, 103timed out RPC error, 225token ring card, booting error with, 224transceiver cable problem message, 220troubleshooting

booting from network with DHCP, 225booting from wrong server, 225general installation problems

booting from the network with DHCP, 225booting the system, 225

UUnknown client error message, 219upgrade

a boot environmenta boot environment, 90

description, 33examples, 157, 165, 168failed upgrade, 230failed upgrade recovery, 117guidelines for, 90non-global zones

administering boot environments, 154compare boot environments, 155example, 153graphic of, 142list file systems, 154lumount command, 156overview, 141separate file system, 147step-by-step procedure, 148

task map, 89–90tasks, 90

install a Solaris Flash archive, 105to a Solaris Update release, 247–249

Vview configuration of boot environments, non-global

zones, 154viewing, configuration of boot environments, 138volume

RAID-0, description, 29RAID-1, description, 29

Volume Manager, See Solaris Volume Manager

WWARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT

DEVICE, 226WARNING: clock gained xxx days message, 220

Index

265

ZZFS

creating a boot environment, 191from another source, 206in a new pool, 201in the same pool, 197

migratingwith non-global zones, 209

migrating from UFS to ZFS, 191overview, 175planning, 187

Index


Documents

Solaris Live Upgrade